TWI226164B - A system, method and article of manufacture for a network-based predictive fault management system - Google Patents

Abstract

A system, method and article of manufacture are provided for predictive fault management over a network. First, a performance of a network is monitored. Any degradation in the performance of the network is identified. A future performance of the network is predicted based on the identified degradation in the performance of the network. Then the predicted future performance is compared to performance requirements of service level agreements of a plurality of network users to identify any future problems in meeting the performance requirements. The network is reconfigured to avoid the problems in meeting the performance requirements.

Description

1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 V. Invention Description (() Field of Invention) The present invention relates to a fault management system, and in particular, to a prediction error in the network and a replanning of the network to compensate for the error.

The current telecom service provider network reflects the architecture of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) developed over the past century. This network architecture is largely based on circuit-switched technology. Initially, all telex services were provided by the wired infrastructure. Over the past few decades, the number of users has increased and demand has changed, and new types of services have emerged, such as wireless PSTN, cable video, and multiple services (PSTN, video, satellite). Along the existing PSTN network, networks supporting these services were created and became parallel networks. As the technology matures, some convergence occurs on the network architecture (for example, they share the same SONET backbone). In the late 1980s, with the explosion of data networking and the Internet, data networking networks such as frame relays and asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) networks were developed. Came out, and later a large network-based data network was constructed in parallel with the existing PSTN infrastructure. These data networks only share the PSTN infrastructure again at the SONET backbone. This state of the current network is called the existing "Core". Therefore, the "core" network is a set of parallel networks; PSTN, wireless, satellite, cable, ATM, frame relay, and IP. In these parallel networks (such as PSTN and 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW) Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I ---------- installation -------- order · -------- (please Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 1226164 __B7___ V. There are some interoperability between the services on the invention description (* >) line, but in general, these networks are vertically integrated To provide different sets of non-interoperable services. The exponential growth of Internet access and intranet service requirements is driving the need for a communications infrastructure that can quickly launch, transfer, and ensure the performance of new communications services. This reform is due to the dramatic transfer of customer preferences from products to services. Whether it is financial transactions, shopping at home, video conferences, telephone calls, education, or other large data applications, businesses and customers are seeking this "new world" Infrastructure One Generation Road (Next Generation Network)-as the main channel for service delivery. Indeed, research shows that in the next 3 to 5 years, data traffic will surpass voice at a ratio of 10: 1. There are many opportunities for communication service providers to Innovate their business models and service delivery capabilities, or create new business opportunities and solutions through alliances with high-tech, multimedia and entertainment companies. Customers' needs for new and innovative services, combined with increased competitiveness and Internet access 肓Growth, and the integration of intranets, all of which is creating large-scale pressures to switch to today's telex communication networks. Communications service providers are happy to create the infrastructure needed to support this demand. However, telephone and data centers The dramatic convergence of technology requires a radical new strategy for network design and development. "New World" requires communications companies to transform their core network system from a voice-centric circuit-switched platform to a packet-switched network or a new-world network 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) | Install -------- Order --------- s'. Employee Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed _ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (3) Although the infrastructure itself is very important to enable this capability, it will increase the company's development and maintain a standard Products (services that are identifiable to customers) are also important. Just as difference creation is important in its ability to communicate differences to customers. For sales purposes, there is an urgent need to demonstrate system capabilities to customers. Summary of the Invention The present invention provides a system, method, and manufactured product for predictive error management via a network. First, monitor network performance. Confirm any degradation in network performance. The future performance of the network is then predicted based on the degradation identified in the network performance. Compare the predicted future performance with the performance requirements of the service level agreement of several network users to identify any future issues in meeting the performance requirements. Reconfigure the network to avoid future problems in meeting performance requirements. Degradation can be caused by equipment errors and actual transmission errors. Another source of degradation may be network errors. Network reconfiguration can optionally be performed in real time. In addition, the operations used to monitor and predict network performance and reconfigure configurations can be continuously repeated in real time. Brief Description of the Drawings In order to make the above-mentioned objects, features, and advantages of the present invention more comprehensible, the preferred embodiments are described below in detail with the accompanying drawings as follows:

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --------- (Please read the back first Note: Please fill out this page again.) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Figure 1A is an example block diagram of a telex communication system according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Figure 1B is a block diagram of network data management according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 1B-1 is a flowchart showing network data according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Management program; Figure 1C is a block diagram of a customer interface management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 1C-1 is a flowchart of a customer interface management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. Figure 1D is a block diagram of a customer service quality management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 1D-1 is a flowchart of a customer service quality management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Section 1E The drawing shows a preferred embodiment of the present invention Service quality management block diagram; Figures 1E-1 are flowcharts of service quality management procedures according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 1F is a problem processing procedure according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Block diagrams; Figures 1F-1 are flowcharts of a problem processing management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. Figure 1G is a block diagram of a level evaluation and discount program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. ; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 4 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order—- ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 1226164 __B7 _ V. Description of the invention (f) Figure 1G-1 is the level assessment and discount shown according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention Program flow chart; Figure 1H is a block diagram of the invoice and collection procedure according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 1H-1 is a flowchart of the invoice and collection procedure according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention Figure 2A is a drawing through a coupling network according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Figure 2B is a block diagram of a computer system example drawn according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 3 is a call detail record (Call Detail Record, CDR) drawn according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention ) And a private network record (Private Network Record, PNR) call record format; Figures 4A and 4B are extended call detail records (Expanded Call Detail Record (ECDR) and Expanded Private Network Record (EPNR) call record format; Figure 5 shows the Operator Service Record (OSR) and Private Connection Service Record (Private Service Record) according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention. Operator Service Record (POSR) call record format;

Figures 6A and 6B show the Extended Operator Service Record (EOSR) and Extended Private Service Record (Expanded 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW) according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Packing -------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (fc)

Private Operator Service Record (EPOSR) call record format; Figure 7 is a switch event record (SER Event) call record format shown in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figures 8A and 8B are The control flow chart according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention is shown to show the conditions for the switch to use the extended record format. Figure 9 is the control flow chart according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention to show the changes Time command; FIG. 10 is a control flow chart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to display a command for changing daylight saving time; FIG. 11 is a control flow chart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention To display the network call identification code (Network Call Identifier, NCID) exchanger call program processing; Figure 12 is a control flow chart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to display the call identification of the received network Code program processing; Figure 13A is a control flowchart shown in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention to show the generation of a call identification code; Figure 13B is based on the present invention The control flow chart shown in the preferred embodiment of the present invention is used to display the call identification code added to the call log; FIG. 14 is a control flow chart shown in accordance with the preferred embodiment of the present invention to show the transmission of a call; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 6 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ installed (please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page)

---- Order --------- Line I Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (?) Figure 15A is drawn according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention The flowchart shown is to show the Fault Management Process; Figure 15B is a block diagram drawn according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention to show the Fault Management component; Figure 16A is A flowchart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention is shown to show a Proactive Threshold Management Process; FIG. 16B is a flowchart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to show a network Road sensing process (Network Sensing Process); FIG. 17 is a flow chart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to display an Element Management Process; FIG. 18 is a preferred view according to the present invention The flowchart shown in the embodiment shows a three-tiered customer support process; Figure 19 is a flowchart according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention The integrated IP telephony process is shown; FIG. 20 is a flowchart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to display a data mining process; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122 .TW 7 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order --------- Line · Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) Figure 21 is a flowchart according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention to show service providers, The main points of contact between customers and suppliers; Figure 22 is a simplified view of the services and network providers using procedures according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 23 is a preferred embodiment according to the present invention Shown is the relationship between procedures, functions, and data in a system. FIG. 24 is a high-level structure of a network management program, a supporting function cluster group, and a data area dependent thereon according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 25 is a preferred embodiment according to the present invention The illustrated location configuration of the network management program in the Telecommunication Management Network (TMN); FIG. 26 is a network planning and development program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention , Including input and output triggers. FIG. 27 is a functional group and data area of a network planning and development process according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 28 is a network provisioning process according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention , Including input and output triggers; FIG. 29 is a functional group and data area of a network provisioning program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 30 is a diagram according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Network inventory management program, including input and output triggering; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 8 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---------- ---- 1 ---- Order ----- 1 — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (q) Figure 31 is the best according to the present invention The functional group and data area of the network inventory management program shown in the embodiment; FIG. 32 is the network maintenance and recovery program shown in the preferred embodiment of the present invention, including input and output triggers; The figure shows the network maintenance and recovery procedure according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention. Function group and data area; Figure 34 shows the network data management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, including input and output triggers; Figure 35 shows the function group of the network data management program Group and data area; Figure 36 shows the network management structure of the present invention; Figure 37 shows the TMN hierarchical management structure of the present invention; Figure 38 shows the Customer Care Lifecycle of the present invention. ); Figure 39 shows the typical service management life cycle of the invention; Figure 40 shows the network management life cycle of the invention; Figure 41 shows the relationship between customer maintenance, service management and network management of the invention Lifetime interaction; Figure 42 shows five high-level network management enterprise procedures and thirteen subroutines; Figure 43 shows the locations of procedures and subroutines; and procedures, functional cluster groups, and data shown in Figure 22 The relative relationship between regions; Figure 44 is an example of how to use two connected workflows according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 9 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) π-Binding --------- line ιϋΓ Printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 _B7_ Explanation of the invention ((〇) Figure 45 shows the flow of the network provisioning procedure in Figure 28; Figure 46 shows the flow of the network data management procedure in Figure 34 (please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page) Renkou · Buren, Figure 47 shows the network performance monitoring subroutine of Figure 42; Figure 48 shows the network test management subroutine of Figure 42; Figure 49 shows Figure 42 Network configuration and routing subroutine; Figure 50 is a flowchart of a method for implementing a coupled network according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 51 is a Next Generation Netowrk, NGN) prototype configuration example; Figure 52 is another example configuration of the NGN prototype shown in accordance with the preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 53 is shown in accordance with the preferred embodiment of the present invention Another example configuration of the NGN prototype; FIG. 54 is an NGN diagram according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention Another example configuration of the prototype; Figure 55 is another example configuration of the NGN prototype according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention; Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Figure 56 is based on the present invention Fig. 57 is another example configuration of the NGN prototype shown in the preferred embodiment of the present invention; Fig. 57 is another example configuration of the NGN prototype shown in the preferred embodiment of the present invention; Fig. 58 is according to the present invention The flow chart of the method for predictive error management through the network shown in the preferred embodiment; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 10 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (11) Figure 59 shows a schematic diagram of some exemplary services of the present invention that can be integrated into the NGN Enterprise Simulator; (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Figure 60 shows Schematic diagram of the four strategic platforms of the present invention that can be integrated into the NGN Enterprise Simulator; Figure 61 shows how the NGN Enterprise Simulator can utilize the entire enterprise simulator by integrating network conversion assets with other market supply assets. Architecture: Figure 62 is an example operation map that can be used to define and implement the NGN enterprise simulator program; Figure 63 shows the use network as the underlying support infrastructure, which provides intelligent connections between various NGN components Figure 64 is a flowchart of a network creation process according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure 65 is a network and service provision script according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention; Figure shows a flowchart of a method for demonstrating business capabilities in an e-commerce environment; Figure 67 shows how e-commerce capabilities can be simulated in a NGN prototype (or other) network; employee spending at the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative printed Figure 68 shows a method for simulating the operation of a service provider network; Figure 69 shows the component diagram of the NGN enterprise simulator of the present invention; Figure 70 shows the NGN business enterprise simulator of the present invention An example of a distribution plan; 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 11 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative I 1226164 A7 I _ B7 V. Description of the invention (β) Figure 71 shows a model location, during which the network construction of the present invention can provide the connection method shown in Figure 70; Figure 72 shows a Table for the basis of alternative solution evaluation, used to evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of various solutions at the high level, and assign a comparative rating to each area; Figure 73 is a high-speed network according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention Figure 7 4 shows the relationship between the components of the network shown in Figure 7 3; Figure 75 a shows a table of network services based on customer needs; Figure 75b lists the characteristics of network services List; Figure 75c lists the example performance requirements for the service and lists the example service interface; Figure 76 lists the network implementation that discusses the choice of a provider-level edge network option; Figure 77 lists the review and selection of a simple connection network Implementation of network options; Figure 78 lists various options for different network components; Figure 79 shows the first example of the network architecture of the present invention, which provides basic IP connectivity between websites; Figure 80 shows Show the invention The second example of the circuit architecture is designed to form an edge network, and the aforementioned "Simple Connectivity Network" can be connected; and 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 12 This paper standard applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --------- line «< Please read the back first Please note this page and fill in this page again) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (〇) Figure 8 1a to 8 Id chart lists a summary of the various goals achieved by each listed scheme. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION According to at least one preferred embodiment of the present invention, a prototype network system is provided to demonstrate the capabilities of a high-speed broadband network. The high-speed broadband network is described in the next paragraph, followed by a description of the prototype network, including hardware implementation. Following the discussion of the prototype network is a description of the enterprise simulator, especially to describe the enterprise capabilities of the prototype and / or high-speed broadband network. High-speed Broadband Network The following table lists some of the terms printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, and Consumer Cooperatives, as well as their abbreviations for AAA. Authentication, Authorization, and Addressing ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line AIN Advanced Intelligent Networks ΑΑΑ Automatic Message Accounting ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode BIM Business Integration Methodolog BSS Business Support System CDR Call Detail Record (C a 1 1 D etai 1 Record) DTMF Dual-Tone Mult

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW

13 --------- 1 — · !! — 1 order · — — — — — — — — ^ ιρ · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

V. Description of Invention U 屮) G S Μ IN IP JP EP LMDS MPEG NGN OSS PCM PSTN QoS R A S S C E S C P S M D S S S P SONET S T P

Gil (b system o system M news or pass f move m-line te ball s full sy

nt group rt service Di I ¥ egen '^ jun p ΠχΪ t set home X get n co 1) special E with ol road Co like re-point-P network to map tu multi-ti 〇he C domain U1 C Zhi N network pr link P area M road r network wo

Γ G n

η g) lο π ρ t iua V ο r ο e MGrell l (tG s r ¥ e t jun px home J special ce like re road orl VI diagram u network w er state let generation et s move p times N

e N o m 1Kp (e u road e system st (p) net el system sy change on T change tune ti cross dk) support rt code 3 words "1 sex po edit u electric tcwo for w charge od public wiet

u Q rvGrv service It eiret) server u ve (snv (s ^ M server er environment E point 0 count 4) s ring n according to p speed he quality ce take s make 10 system 01 high tc product VI storage es create at control tr type wi service r end CC service re service ο service change s service se far A service cr service C delivery csws road et point rv according to the ni network N according to the hi learning al transfer a transfer tc optical ic transfer service Yi step pt service

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in Page) nuoo

m e R e o e Order --------- line 6 em a s u o n e 14 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ___B7_ _ V. Description of the invention ()

Transfer Point) TCP Transmission Control Protocol (T r a n s m i s s i 〇 n

Control Protocol) xDSL Digital Subscriber Line (G e n e r i c name for Digital Subscriber Line)) W D (Dense) Division Multiplexing ((D e n s e) M WaveDivision

Multiplexing) In today's competitive communications market, it is not enough to keep customers satisfied; it is the current game rule to keep customers away from competition by providing the latest IP services and the lowest price products. As we enter the next century, communication service providers will face two challenges: (1) increased competition in their core markets, and (2) a large demand for network resources caused by high-frequency bandwidth and IP applications. The first requirement requires service providers to reduce costs and optimize resources; the second requirement requires them to invest in new infrastructure and expand their service delivery projects. Reducing costs and increasing revenues are in the price problem, while the lower layers are provided by the Internet conversion market supply. Communications service providers can reconcile seemingly conflicting needs caused by switching networks to a new broadband, next-generation network infrastructure. This intelligent, coupled architecture that can effectively support circuit-switched (voice) and packet-switched (data) traffic can enable service providers to launch many new broadband data services. Communication service providers can transfer traditional networks to services and consolidate and optimize these services and network resources into a single packet network, thereby reducing costs and increasing the manageability of the entire network conversion. There are a number of factors that must be considered in a network transition:

1 · Transfer from circuit-switched to packet-switched network; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) -------------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the consumer cooperative 1226164 a7 B7 V. Description of the invention (0) 2. Traditionally, the transfer of benefits from voice services provided by wireless service providers via wired access; 3. On the "application tone" The contrast between the emergence of new services and the dial tones that exist everywhere today; 4. Reliance on the customer's corporate strategy as the endpoint of users' network services; 5. Moving to smarter self-service processes that enable customers to create and manage Their own service. Figure 1 illustrates how service providers and companies are transforming to meet the trends emerging in the telecommunications industry. The telecom industry has greatly proven to be a very profitable market for service providers and high-tech suppliers. The market is changing. Expanded competitiveness and deregulation have broken down barriers and made markets more accessible, while another service provider is emerging globally to share these profitable opportunities. The needs of customers are also changing. People are exchanging electronic mail (e-mail) globally, shopping over the Internet, accessing the World Wide Web, holding video conferences, and increasingly requiring larger bandwidth services to meet their applications . In order to remain competitive in this environment, service providers must change their business of previously selling bandwidth and move to selling new data services at a competitive price. Changes and developments in the market continue to affect corporate networks. By using the Internet as a necessary link between the company's suppliers, regional offices and customers, the company has been able to expand their business area globally. For the intranet and extranet, which extend from the intranet to a specific supplier, GU 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 16 This paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) ------------- i III I--Order ------- line · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative 1226164 A7 _____B7_ V. Invention requirements ((z)) Customer's external network), video conferencing, and collaborative computing requirements, forcing them to exceed their ability to manage their own network growth. Increasingly, companies want to focus on building their business and let communications service providers manage complex networks and absorb devices with short blinking cycles. Communications service providers seek a fast-growing market in managed network services, with a view to meeting the needs of businesses at attractive prices. Despite the emerging customer base and terrible competition, communication service providers have decided to maintain important market allocations. In the past, traditional network infrastructure has served well. However, to meet today's and tomorrow's challenges, they must transform their network infrastructure into a more robust and service-independent broadband architecture. With the Next Generation Network, they can not only provide a wide range of services in a more timely manner, but also reduce costs, increase marginal benefits, and provide more competitively priced services to their customers. This enhanced service model (discussed below) confirms this view. Network Switching Implementation IP market provisioning has been established to assist service providers in transforming their networks. Through the use of the Internet, communication service providers will respond more firmly to new market demands. In fact, a 'forward-looking communications service provider is already in the process of seeking tomorrow's network architecture. In the past, traditional network infrastructure has served well, but in order to win customers today or even in the near future, communication service providers will need to switch their current networks to become a smart, broadband Next-generation network infrastructure. 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 17 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ^ — Order -------- -Line m (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Invention Description ((g) For both data access and skeleton connection, today's data networks rely heavily on shared media and packets Packet-based LAN technology. The use of packet switching systems, such as bridges and routers, to connect these regional networks to the global Internet is now widespread. Internet routers must be able to handle packets in many different protocols (pr 〇 t 〇c ο 1), including IP, IPX, DECNET, AppleTALK, OSI, SNA, and other protocols. Use these different protocols to build A network capable of exchanging packets around the world has a complexity that is challenging for both suppliers and users. A standard LAN system can work smoothly at transmission rates of up to 100 MbpS. At the transmission rate Higher than 1 Above 00 Mbps, it becomes economically impractical to provide the processing power required for packet switching to connect to a network group. This economic inability to “scale up” performance begins As a result, the planned network expansion for some users is limited. Furthermore, today's data networks do not provide sufficient control to bandwidth managers and user access to network managers.

Ming Yue's network is expected to support multimedia applications with wider bandwidth and real-time transmission requirements. The next generation network should also have the ability to dynamically reconfigure the network configuration, so that it can guarantee a predetermined amount of bandwidth for the required quality of service (QOS). This includes providing access, performance, error tolerance and security between a specific set of end systems controlled by any network administrator. This concept is to provide a complete "command (common) to the entire network infrastructure, and 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ( Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page)-— — LI — — — — — — — — — — — — — Printed by the Employees ’Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Employees’ Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Fifth, the description of the invention (1 / () "Control" gives network managers, not just tell them when a mistake has occurred. A type is called asymmetric transfer mode (asynchr () n () Us Uansfer mode, ATM) technology can provide the best and long-range solutions to the implementation requirements of private and public Internet. For the implementation of ultra-high-performance information networks that can provide the service quality required by users, ATM promises to provide more economic And adjustable technology. Therefore, in the next 20 years, the network infrastructure can change from a packet-based standard to an ATM cell exchange. Although the network The change will be dramatic, and won by users as they transition to be able to retain the most recent investment in equipment. Another change expected by tomorrow's network is data flow. In general, today's network The data flow follows the client-server computing model. This

This is where many clients can transfer all data into or out of one or more web servers. In general, clients do not talk to each other, but share data through the use of servers. Although this type of data exchange will continue, more information flow in tomorrow's network will be peer-to-peer. Because the ultimate goal is a truly decentralized computing environment, where all the systems act as servers and clients, more data streams will follow the peer-to-peer communication model. The network will be needed to provide more direct access to all peers who wish to use a high-performance backbone Internet connection, such as a desktop computer. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --- ------ Line 411 ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ________B7__ V. Description of the invention (> 0) The transmission of the entire information in the future Will be digital native. The bandwidth required for digital information will be much greater than the bandwidth used by today's separate voice, fax, and SNA networks that operate on voice-grade (v oc e g r a d e) telephone lines with acceptable efficiency. Voice will be reduced to only a few percentage points of the entire data flow, while other forms of information, including images and video, will increase substantially. Even when technology for compressing this data is available, the bandwidth requirements for both the inside and outside of the network need to be greatly expanded. Text files and images can be transmitted over existing packet-based networks, as the transfer of such information is not time-consuming. The new data traffic (voice and video) is very sensitive to the transmission time. Changing or too long time delay will degrade the service quality and make the information priceless. The practicality of packet-switched networks has long been studied for digital information transmission, especially burst type information transmission. This type of network is essentially point-to-point. By attaching the address of a packet, it can be directed from a single source to a single destination. The network connects the packet to the correct destination in response to the packet's address. Packet switching networks are also used to combine burst data with more continuous information such as voice, high-quality audio, and motion video. The commercialization of voice, video, and audio transmissions requires them to be able to link packets to multiple destinations. This is called packet broadcast. For example, a broadcast video service, such as pay-per-view television, transmits each packet of a single source video packet 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 20 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Ϊ226164 A7 ^ --------- V. Description of Invention (74) was sent to multiple video receivers. Similarly, the ability to talk in voice communications requires transmission from a single source to multiple destinations. One conventional packet broadcast configuration includes a network that includes a packet duplication arrangement, followed by a packet routing arrangement. When a broadcast packet enters this network, 'in the packet copying process' the packet will be copied to the same number as the destination to be transmitted. A translation lookup table is then executed for each packet copy when the output is copied and arranged to provide a different and single destination address for each copy. All packet copies and their new packet addresses are then applied to the packet routing 歹 iJ ’which connects each packet to the correct network output port. In a packet exchange network, packets in the form of data are transmitted from a source, such as a user terminal, a computer, a computer application, or other data processing or data communication element, to a destination. A data processing or data communication component with the same characteristics. Generally, in the content of network technology, the component itself is regarded as the user. Data blocks or frames are passed along the path between network nodes. Each block contains a packet and control information in the form of a header and a tailer, which are attached to the packet when leaving each node. Generally, in addition to the destination address field, the file header includes several secondary fields, such as operation code, source address, serial number, and length code. The end of the file is generally a technical field, which is used to generate a redundancy check, such as a cyclic redundancy code (CRC) used to detect errors. At the other end of the link, 'receiving node 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 21 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --------------- ------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 V. Invention Description (#) Meeting Remove control information, perform necessary synchronization and error detection, and re-insert control information for packets leaving. In part, 'packet exchanges' are being developed in networks that allow access to host computers to meet the needs of low-cost data communications. Special-purpose computers assigned as communications processors have been developed for offloading communications processing tasks that previously required host computer processing. The communication processor is suitable for the interface with the host computer and is used to forward packets along the network. As a result, such processors are often referred to simply as packet switches. A data concentrator has also been developed as an interface with the host computer and is used to forward packets along the network. Basically, the data concentrator is used to exchange links used by several young children to a smaller number of heavier connections. They are often used with or before packet exchange. In a virtual circuit (VC) or connection-oriented transmission, packet-switched data transmission is accomplished through a network with a predetermined endpoint-to-endpoint path, where packets are transmitted over the network At the same time, user packets share the link and switch facilities with a large number of users. Packets may need to be stored at nodes between network transmission links until the packets are forwarded individually by individual outward links along the overall path. In connectionless transmission, another packet-switched data transmission mode does not require an initial connection procedure for a data path through the network. In this mode, individual data telegrams containing destination addresses are transferred from the source to the destination via the intermediary node through the network, and do not need to reach the destination in the order transmitted.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---------- Order ----- -1—line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (>)) The widely used T e 1 net public packet exchange network Road uses a two-level hierarchy to forward data. Hierarchical structure includes a long distance span spanning backbone network with multiple nodes or hubs (one 〇1g distance-spanning) 1-way 'each hub uses a backbone switch cluster; the hierarchical structure also includes a number of backbone trunks Smaller regional networks, and access lines and lower-level switches in clusters connected to each hub. Packet exchange data is transmitted via the network in a virtual circuit VC. It uses the CCITT (International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee of the International T e 1 ecommunicati ο ns U ni ο n) X · 7 5 protocol, which is an agreement with χ · 25 Compatible enhanced version. For a communications conference that performs connections between groups, it is essential to present information in a form that can be identified and used. The sequence of tasks required at each endpoint, such as the format of the data passed to a group, the transmission rate of the data, and the rearrangement of received out-of-sequence data, are generally implemented in a systematic way using a layered communication architecture To deal with. This architecture deals with two parts of communication. One is that the data transmitted by an end user to the communication network should make the data arriving at the destination correct and timely; the other is that the transmitted data must be able to identify and use the correct form. These two parts are dealt with by protocols or by standard communications practices, the former being handled by network protocols, and the latter being handled by higher-level protocols. Each agreement has a series of levels. Examples of hierarchical architectures include the Systems Network Architecture (SNA) developed by IB MU, and interactive connection with later-developed open systems (〇pe n Systems 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 23 This paper standard applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) --------------- I--ί Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (yes)

Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The latter has seven layers: from the lowest to the highest layer, the lowest three layers are network service-oriented, including the physical layer, the data link layer, and the network layer; followed by four layers In order to provide services to endpoint users, it uses a transport layer, session layer, presentation layer, and application layer. X.25 is a three-tier architecture An interface used to refer to data terminal equipment (DTE), computers, and other user systems or devices, through which data circuit terminating equipment used to control DTE access to the network , DCE) to a packet switched network. The three-layer interface architecture of X · 25 includes a physical level, a frame level, and a packet level. Although the data communication between DCEs on the network is usually handled by a network operator applying a technology different from X.25, the communication between individual user systems and individual DCs as a control interface to the network It is still managed by X.25 or a similar agreement. Basically, X.25 establishes intensive control procedures among users, as well as connection setup (connection) and connection elimination (disconnection) of individual users in the DTE-DCE interface, error handling and other packet transmission services. X.25 is used as a virtual circuit (VC) connection, which includes connection setup, data transfer, and connection erasure periods. The connection settings between the DTEs connected to the network are sent by DTE X. 2 5 Connection request packet (call- 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 24 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order --------- Line 0 Printed by the Employees 'Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System five, invention description (> <) request packet) to the relevant DCE to establish, the packet contains the channel number as a logical connection, the DTE address of the calling and receiving, parameters specifying the call characteristics, and data. The destination DCE sends an incoming connection packet to the destination DTE, where the incoming connection packet has the same general format as the connection request packet, and the destination DTE will respond with a connection accept packet (call_accepted packet). In response, the connected DCE sends a connection packet to its associated DTE. At this moment, the connection can be established 'and the data transfer period is started by the transmission of the data packet. When the connection ends, that is, the end of the connection conversation, the connection erasure process is started. The expected routing path in the network is initially determined by the network control center, which then sends these predetermined paths to the backbone switch as a routing table, which includes the links available from each hub Primary and secondary choices. The secondary selection is only selected if the primary link fails. And the specific secondary link selection is based on the current or recent traffic congestion by individual hubs as regional selections. When the outgoing link sent from the hub is not available when the connection is established, it will cause the virtual circuit to clear the found link to the previous hub. Then, from this hub, an alternative link is selected, or when the link is still not available there, the V C circuit will be removed again to the previous hub, and so on until an available path is revealed from the path table. About the link and / or hub failure @ message will immediately communicate with the Network Control Center, and this center will distribute this information to the rest of the network. In current general concentrators and packet switches, data processing components are assembled in several interface cards or circuit boards, which include printed circuits or integrated circuits.

4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --- ------ Line ImJ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 ___B7 _ V. Description of the invention (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The circuit is used to cooperate with the system software Various functions of individual components. Generally, the interface card is inserted into the slot in the console case, and the data bus is accessed through the bottom plate for communication with other interface cards or other components in the network. VME bus is the most commonly used 16/3 2-bit backplane bus. The interface card or circuit board referred to here represents various devices included in the above interface card or circuit board. In the network, many public data networks (PDNs) provide little or no security facilities between several users and the host computer or other data processors. The purpose is to keep the network public and A substantial number of actual and expected user access needs. Where access restrictions are required, an authorized (ID) number or password, or both, is usually assigned to each authorized user and must be used to gain access to the host computer. More sophisticated security measures are necessary to access highly confidential data. The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives prints certain data communication networks with various customers, each of whom makes his host computer and one or more databases available to his users' and A security level is placed on the database, which is different from what other customers place on their individual hosts and databases, etc. |. In these examples, the habit is to make the host responsible for security and access to its own and related databases. Therefore, a user can have access to specific destinations in the network without restriction, but cannot access other destinations. Market Drivers According to Yankee Group Research

Research, the cost of network management continues to increase, and the network administrator's budget percentage is 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 ___ B7 ___ > β ___ 5. Description of the invention (>)) Forty-five percent are spent on ongoing network management, 20% are used for equipment, and 35% are used for network transmission services. To reduce these costs, but also to improve the overall service to customers is a constant war. It is very difficult to reduce the overall network management costs in today's mall environment. As more and more demands are placed on network managers and designers, the network structure is becoming increasingly complex. For example, with the exponential growth of remote access, their work becomes more and more difficult. Without additional staff or budget sources, the need to establish and manage remote office and telecom communications is often required. Unfortunately, network managers and designers spend too much time in the so-called "fire-fighting" mode, trying to support their complex network architecture, and only a small part of the time is actually spent on designing the network Growth and strengthening. The combination of the above facts makes it increasingly difficult to retain highly skilled employees in markets where certain technologies are needed and when additional subsidies are given to these technologies. So, what should a network administrator do? More and more people are looking outward for help. The market for customer network management services is commonly referred to as Managed Networked Services (MNS). The Yankee Research Group estimates that this market will grow from US $ 300 million to US $ 900 million over the next three years. When they saw that the frame relay service doubled in revenue for two consecutive years, MNS became the focus of service providers in 1995. By providing leased and managed routers as a way to accelerate frame relay services, it has prospered to many different services, and it is now closer to things related to outsourced resources. Yankee research group shows that 37% of the wealth of 1,000 managers are already doing outsourced resource management 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 27 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) • Installation (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order --------- line; printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 1226164 ____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (required) (Please (Read the notes on the back before filling out this page.) Or plan to turn their ongoing network operations management into an outsourced resource. In addition, communication providers are identified as the most likely providers of one-stop shopping services. There are two aspects to the NM / MNS market supply to be implemented in the overall mode of the present invention. The current opportunity presented by the market itself is MNS. For customers, however, this market opportunity is quite large. They need assistance to understand data network management. For many years, they have only focused on voice. In addition, in order to maintain and increase revenue, they need to quickly enter this market. In this regard, the present invention includes a set of resources, which mainly include work assistance and software, which can greatly reduce the lead time for customers to implement services. Second, the present invention provides tools to assist service providers to enable It better manages their supplier data network, the future packet-switched network. The invention further strengthens and adjusts MNS resources in the data network world to cut into supplier network management. This solution template allows circuit and packet switching network control centers and labor to be reduced. i-line-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The market supply of this invention suggests that companies adopt a gradual approach to pass MNS. One end of the continuous zone includes the MNS for current network services, which includes leased lines, frame relay services, and X · 2 5 protocols. At the far end are long-term contracts for MNS with outsourced resources, which cost millions of dollars. The NM / MNS market supply proposes that companies go beyond the management of WAN and routers and enter the world of local area network (LAN), even for desktop computers and business enterprise applications. Because LAN and its equipment

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 1226164 B7__ V. Description of the invention (1) Management of equipment and applications is not the expertise of service providers. Service providers have been coerced by these proposals in the past. Because MNS is so new, it is difficult to describe a typical MNS. Here are three "entry points" that are used in this invention to assist companies in entering the MNS market. Business Strategy-Companies can view the invention as an aid in creating business strategies to enter the MNS market. In general, this type of use will define a company's target market for MNS (small, medium, and large markets) and define the service offerings that best fit the company's supply. Following this use will be analysis, design and implementation plans. Demand Analysis-Companies may have developed specific business strategies that define what services to provide in the market. In this example, the work of the present invention begins to help define the company's network environment needs. This work will be followed by design and implementation plans. Design and Implementation-The company may have entered the design and implementation period to create MNS capabilities. Generally speaking, the present invention will confirm that their network meets the needs of providing services, and then assist customers in designing and implementing a suitable solution supporting measures. An online directory dedicated to clear communication on how to accurately define NM / MNS as a service has been established. The solution of the present invention is a continuous cycle that starts with four main procedures related to NM / MNS. These programs drive the technical and human makeup of the solution. In each program, there are several core functions and sub-functions. MNS Online Catalog Package 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 29 _This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ «Installation (please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) Order --------- Printed by the Consumers 'Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 1226164 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _B7_ ) Contains all of this information, including support procedures, technical and organizational solutions for each function. One solution is called Managed Networked Services Integrated

Solution, MNSIS), and has been developed based on integrated procedures, technical and human considerations. Process At the highest level, four main processes must be executed to manage the network. Service Planning Management Change Operation Management Service Management In order to provide a complete NM / MNS solution, every procedure should be performed. As mentioned earlier, each program has several related functions and minor functions that provide a complete description of the program. The main functions associated with each program are as follows. Technology (T e c h η ο 1 〇 g y) The main goal of technology solutions is to provide access to network information to make decisions based on the information. The invention includes three layers of management: element management, information services management, and presentation management. Each action starts with an incident. Cheng 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 30 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------— 11—Order ------ --Line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 _ '" " — | _ 5. Description of the invention ον) The order is tailored to use technology to deal with incidents, and it will respond to each The unique characteristics of an incident. Component manager The component manager communicates with network components to receive alerts and warnings via trapping and polling technology. The component manager is at the same level as the primary data reduction function. At this level, the events received by the component manager will be filtered first to aggregate the correlation with J Ge to isolate the problem further in the network. Information deemed important to the monitoring and management network is translated into a standard object format and forwarded to the information service manager. The component manager can be software, but it is not necessary ~ it must be software, which is used to open standards, such as common object requirements of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Object Management Group's (OMG) Broker Architecture (Common Object Request Broker Architecture, CORBA) 〇 Information Service Management The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs employee consumer cooperatives printed information service managers to provide data management and data communication between component managers and expression managers. All data forwarded from the component manager & is used by the information service manager to provide information to network operators. The Ziyan Service Manager connects to the CORBA standard to use Object Request Broker (ORB) to provide ubiquitous access to information. The ORB allows information service managers to share management information stored in a decentralized database. · 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 31 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (々 >) Information service managers store important management information in operational (real-time) and analytical (historical) decentralized databases. These databases provide common storage data so that new products can be easily inserted into the management environment. For example, if an event is received at the component manager 'and considered important for display to network users, the information service manager will store a copy of the alert in the operations database, The alert is then forwarded to the appropriate network operator. Media and text databases are also provided by information service managers. The library includes online manuals for management purposes, as well as specific information on components for maintenance specialists. The database also provides procedure ’policies and computer-based training to network users. Information service managers provide requested information (real-time and historical) to web users through presentation managers. Presentation manager The presentation manager performs the function as its name presents: presenting information to end users. Because different positions and functions require access to different forms of information, there are at least two different display methods. The first is for a large number of graphical representations, and the second is for random use, such as field technicians. The first environment requires a large number of graphic displays, such as the program provided by X-WINDOWS / MOTIF. The second environment is in areas with poor bandwidth potential for dial-up or wireless access that can be used with more traditional LAN access. This is also where browser technology is used.

People (People) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------— I—Order ---- ----- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Inventor's Outlook on NM / MNS Including the organization of customer service support Model, the corresponding roles and responsibilities of this organizational model, and the thoughtful design of labor switching to packet exchange. Customer service support Customer service support provides a single point of contact for customers. This list ~ Touchpoint provides technical expertise to solve customer incidents, problems and requirements. In general, the best way to meet customer service needs is a three tiered support structure. Each level or level has technology that increases levels based on the work and responsibilities assigned to it. This structure is described below: Tier 1 typically has a large set of expertise and is the first level of customer support. This group is generally responsible for determining 60 to 70 percent of open issues. Tier 2 is technical experts and field support staff who can specialize in specific areas. This group is generally responsible for determining 30 to 40 percent of open issues. Tier 3 is considered a problem-solving expert and often includes hardware vendors, software vendors, or customer application development / maintenance teams (with the necessary in-depth expertise to investigate and make decisions in their area of expertise). They are the last resort to solving the most difficult problems. This group is generally responsible for determining 5 percent or less of open issues. The above model is commonly referred to as the Skilled Model because the personnel in all three levels are highly technical. This model 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 33 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) —. —I — ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (> ψ) Generally creates a high percentage of connections determined by the first connection. Other methods include: Functional Model In this model, users are required to touch different areas (via VRU) based on the nature of the event itself. The connection is transferred to a customer support representative who can best handle the connection. This model can be easily coupled with the technical model and has been coupled in previous customer activations. Bypass Model In this model, layer 1 only records the connections, they do not determine the connections. One advantage of this model is that technical resources do not waste time recording connections. Software and Asset Management Network Service Integration Solution: An integrated network management solution template includes a set of the best-in-class third-party software products that can automatically perform problem diagnosis, notifications, customer development reports, and IP service monitoring. Web-based SLA reporting tool: A browser-based tool that provides personalized SLA reports to customers in templates and special formats. Data collection display: Provides the ability to analyze network management data. It looks for data patterns and correlations through multiple directions. Establish a data behavior model to predict future growth or problems and manage network facilities in a professional, proactive, yet cost effective manner. Customer-to-event correspondence module: This module is added to the management network service integration solution. The management network service integration solution maps network component events. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 34 This paper standard applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back first ¾ fill out this page) rl Pack 0 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (β) To service provision Goods and customers. This tool allows customer service representatives to professionally and proactively deal with customers during periods of network downtime. Program Definition and Function Service Design Service design includes both strategy and tactical design needed to effectively manage a decentralized environment. Although most designs typically occur when the system is first released, some design activities must also be replaceable. Service design ensures that changes can be successfully controlled and implemented. Service management design Operational management design Management change design Strategic design Management change Includes procedures and procedures for handling necessary system or organizational changes in a decentralized environment. Change Control Test Implementation Software Decentralized Operation Management System management includes daily operations functions needed to maintain the system (eg, error detection / correction, security management, and performance management). Production Control Monitoring and Control 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 35 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first # 1Fill in this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (3b) Fault Management Security Management Service Management Service Management Control the entire system User services. He isolates users from how the system manages them, and ensures that users receive the quality support services they need to achieve their daily business activities. SLA / OLA Management Assistance Department Quality Management Accounts and Accounts The present invention includes a system, method, and object for providing a coupled circuit-switched / packet-switched network manufacturing. The hybrid network is used as a transfer network to transfer the old "core" network architecture to the "new core" network. In the description of the present invention, a detailed description of the NGN transfer network will be presented first, and then the specific accounting aspects of the present invention will be described in detail.

With organized speeds determined by the vertical services provided, PSTN, wireless, and cable networks have continued to grow significantly. Initially, the data network used a small portion of the backbone SONET bandwidth, while the PSTN continued to dominate the bandwidth users. Due to the exponential growth of IP traffic, IP-based data networks were quickly chosen to use more bandwidth than the PSTN. Furthermore, the massive technological growth of packet technology has made it possible to carry traditional voice over IP networks. This has begun to move towards the "Next Generation Network (NGN)", where more common network infrastructure will be shared to provide services, and these services are beginning to become more 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ m package (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ---- ----- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 V. Description of the invention (yj) Plus interoperable. The thrust of technology in NGN will provide interoperability between new packet-based infrastructures and existing legacy infrastructures. Due to the large investment in traditional infrastructure, they will still have a similar period of time, but the new idea will be based on a packet-based infrastructure. Increasingly, parallel networks used to provide different services will converge to use a common packet-based backbone, and the only difference is how to provide access methods (such as wired, wireless, cable, and satellite). NGN is a transfer network that will exist during the transition from the current core to the new core. As packet technology continues to evolve rapidly, others will be able to support different services (such as voice, video, and wireless) that were once offered in separate parallel networks on an integrated packet network. There will still be different access technologies (wireless, cable, wired) to access various services, but the access network will use a common "new core network" and its capabilities. These services are interoperable through different access technologies, and users will be free to use services that span many access technologies, such as wireless to cable telephone line services, web browsing from wireless devices, and so on. The present invention uses a mobile method to plan the course of network evolution from circuits to packet-switched technology. In three to seven years, the network becomes a combined circuit and packet topology. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page). Then, the wired network will change from "core" to "NGN" to "new core." It is described in detail. Next, cable, wireless and satellite access networks will be explained. Wired network architecture "core" network architecture

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The “core” network includes parallel p S τ N, SMDS, ATM, frame relay, B / PRI and IP networks. pSTN networks have evolved over the last century ’and are a circuit-switched technology that mixes old and new. The PSTN network mainly provides point-to-point interactive two-way voice communication services. Services have evolved to include many intelligent network (IN) service features. In the late 1980s, Advanced Intelligent Networks (AIN) appeared on the PSTN infrastructure to support a new voice service architecture. Current Intelligent Network (IN) Requirements and Architecture in the "Core" The main IN requirements include conversation establishment, advanced connection procedures, connection paths, and connection processing (network information and connection interruption). Examples of applications and features include the CLASS service family (call waiting, call forwarding, conference calls, call rejection), enhanced connection paths, portable numbers, dial-up card services, and voice messaging services (eg, travel, stock And climate, etc.). These IN capabilities can be activated by devices such as SCP, STP, SSP, and EIP in the AIN environment. These devices participate in the execution and completion of the IN service. In order to develop, test and launch new IN service applications on the above-mentioned components, service providers deploy Service Creation Environment (SCE) platforms.

Provide an environment where you can quickly create new IN services. These SCE platforms are tightly integrated into the execution time environment 'and therefore become the main task with a few exceptions and complicated coordination efforts to drive new or modified IN services in a "core" network environment. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper is finely sized in China Standard (CNS) A4 (21Q X 297 public love) -------------------- Order- ------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) The data network in the "core" When the PSTN continues to grow with its characteristic functionality and traffic requirements, New data networks have been built to support interactive networks of computing devices. These data networks provide regional connectivity at varying transmission bandwidth levels (eg, 56/64 feet, Ding-1 / E · 1, T-3 / E-3, 0C-3 / STM-1). Decentralized computing device. Data networks include many technologies such as SMDS, ATM, frame relay, and IP. In some cases, these data networks are parallel networks, while in other cases, they share common technologies of the backbone architecture (for example, ATM can be used as the backbone of the frame relay and IP data network). These data networks share the same SONET benchmark backbone architecture as the PSTN network. Services and data networks on the PSTN are very different and are not interoperable (eg, voice-to-web access). With the explosive growth of the Internet and the rapid development of packet technology, IP-based data networks have become the main network in terms of user traffic, and their growth continues to increase exponentially. This phenomenon creates a dilemma for traffic designers and engineers of the core network. They have seen the growth of the traffic in the access part of their network (PSTN), but have also learned that they can only make very little profit from their use, because the third-party service providers are already the users of these Internet data. end. These leaders have begun to decentralize intelligent network solutions for data traffic (such as RAS with SS7 gateway) to solve two main challenges. One is to offload data transmission traffic from the voice infrastructure to slow down the face of traditional voice customers Congestion problems; the second is to collect benefits from third-party data service providers (ISPs) from access and routing to their location. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 39 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page first) Installed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 __B7___ V. Description of Invention (ψ〇) Due to the rapid growth of IP and other data services, many new service providers have begun to build data networks based on IP only , And provide data services based on IP only. Their business strategy is to continuously adopt the technological novelty of IP and packet technology, and build a complete set of services on a packet-based infrastructure. Because they only invest in one form of network (different from many parallel networks), the unit cost of their services becomes lower, they do not have the burden of traditional networks and systems, and they can provide cheaper and better services to customers. As a result, they pose a significant threat to telex service providers. Next-generation network architecture When packet-based technologies continue to evolve and provide services that are only available on other networks (such as PSTN, cable), and when new (immature area) service providers continue to take advantage of them, For many responsible service providers, the transition from their "core" network to a "next-generation network" has become a necessity, in which they can share the rapid technological advantages of packet technology and improve their cost structure, as well as at the same time New services available on next-generation networks. New IP-based services in "Next Generation Networks" Although many elements in NGN can ensure interoperability between NGN and PSTN, there are also many new services built entirely on NGN elements, which provide full multimedia Featured communications services (such as voice, video, and data) and enable many eCommerce services to be implemented using IP technology. These components (described in more detail below) include directories, policies, user authentication, registration, and encryption. These components make 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 40 this paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

1 A7 1226164 __B7____ V. Description of the invention (4 丨) Like integrated messaging, multimedia dialogue, on-demand multi-point conversation, enhanced confidentiality and authentication, different levels of media transmission services, and numerous electronic Internet business activities (such as finance, shopping) , Customer care and education, etc.). With the maturity of NGN, third-party plus service providers will develop IP benchmarking services, which will integrate applications such as electronics companies (purchasing, warehousing, distribution, and practice) with endless online finance and integration to current customers. Combined shopping experience. Bandwidth Growth in "Next Generation Networks" In addition to new service features, NGN also uses new cable broadband access technologies, especially xDSL. Traditional wired access technologies will continue to be deployed at higher and higher speeds; wired access technologies will shift from the previously dominant T1 speed to T3 and OC-ri speeds. These new broadband access technologies will increase the demand for higher bandwidth in the NGN core. The NGN core continues to use the SONET backbone architecture, but will gradually shift to (D) WDM technology to provide the bandwidth required to support broadband access. New and emerging technologies, such as Giga-bit Ethernet and wired high-speed IP, can follow their way out to the backbone of the network, but they must wait until Giga-bit Ethernet technology is mature enough to be available. Handle wide-array wide-network services, such as connection-oriented circuit competition. The use of wired high-speed IP technology is suitable for enterprise networks, but lacks the ruggedness and adjustability required for carrying a backbone backbone. For this reason, there is always a need for ATM in the backbone architecture. The architecture in NGN provides interoperability of the complete service between the packet network and the traditional PSTN (interoperability of 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 41 This paper standard applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) ιδ · .Line appeal · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 B7 V. Inventive (UR) services). The new NGN packet-type capabilities will be developed to support AIN-type features while interoperating with traditional PSTN / SS7 / AIN. The large-scale innovation of IP-based IN-type capabilities (such as global number transparency, the use of Internet web-based information, and rich media communications) will create new services for 1P-enabled communication equipment. PSTN innovation is slow ’and may be limited by maintaining interoperability between traditional PSTN and NGN. In many cases, traditional PSTN components (such as SSP, SCP) continue to evolve so that they can use common IP-based packet switching technologies (such as IP, TCP, UDP, etc.) instead of using existing circuit-switched technologies (such as MTP) 〇In the next generation network (NGN), the IN demand and structure of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the consumer co-operatives of the PSTN printed a large amount of revenue and global nature, and its use of SS7 and AIN technology, can achieve interoperability between NGN and PSTN Sexual elements need to be developed. These include IP / PSTN gateways, IP / PSTN address translators, IP / SS7 gateways, IP actuated SSPs, and IP-based smart peripherals. In addition to the IN actuator, new elements (described later) with features such as directory, policy, user authentication, registration, conference encryption, etc. will also be developed to strengthen IN capabilities. NGN-IN actuators will provide the next level of intelligence to be able to handle mixed media forms of communication, control of multiple conference features, collaborative communication needs, ubiquitous network access, "any" to "any" Communication and multimedia delivery information services. It should be noted that these NGN components will continue to develop in the "new core," to provide similarity and enhanced capabilities.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (45) "And the description of new components in" New Core ", which provides enhanced IP-based services. Intelligent IP (I2P) network actuators are classified as follows: Conversation control (bandwidth, switching and routing) Media control (connection processing, such as media conferencing) Policy management (catalog, access control and security) Bandwidth management (Transmission and instant response) The components of NGN are described by individual functional units, but they can be practically combined in individual network equipment based on the principle of requirements. These components are designed to operate in a decentralized network environment to increase the flexibility of using NGN and the new core. This architecture provides a rugged, secure, and isolated messaging infrastructure for disseminating control plane information to these devices. The infrastructure includes a well-defined set of messages to access the functions provided by the components and the data stored in the rules database. The control plane architecture can be effective and have a unique mechanism 'for sharing services, users, and control data without having to duplicate it. This allows mobile NGN service users to maintain the same experience and access to the same information, regardless of where or how they access the network ° Example: Suppose a US NGN service user roams in Europe and wants to access Network, but using special connection information stored in other personal databases in the United States, how to overcome this challenge without copying user data into every rule database on NGN 'to ensure that users do not Will be denied access to the features and services to which the user is subscribed. Obviously, storing or copying this data and then synchronizing and managing it through the global network will be a process

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), binding: -line · 1226164 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description (Shake) The sequence is complicated, costly, and troublesome. The intelligent network architecture will effectively deal with these issues with some mechanisms. These mechanisms can make remote data available locally during the conversation. Then the intelligent network architecture caches the information in a short-term non-volatile manner. In-memory, not external, rule database server. On the other hand, although the user's personal data may actually be stored in the U.S. rules database, the user can access the network from Europe and can automatically be granted access to specific services and features, these specific The services and features of the program are often available to users in the service experience in the United States. Remote conversation controllers in Europe communicate with staggered network location registers and rule database servers' to verify the subscriber's home rule database to get access to the subscriber's policies and individuals Information can be used in Europe; this is done by the inter-device message group (command and control) of the control plane. Other commonly used mechanisms, this mechanism does not copy information to the regional (European) rules database , And make long-range control data management become predictable ° # Design is compatible with COBRA, so it can be connected with other standard network interactions. The Rules Database server determines user data conference requirements, such as bandwidth, service quality, and service level. Routing reference based on priority, cost, and terminal location.

Media and application requirements (between voice calls to voice calls, multi-point 'text to speech and fax to email, etc.). 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation—_ 丨 —Order—11—line mr ( Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ________B7_____ V. Description of the invention (required) Separation of content (for example: telling the smart peripheral and agreement converter in H · 3 2x The voice data stream is separated from the data and video data streams on the connection; it can also instruct the protocol converter to process the data stream so that the voice data stream can be transmitted to the destination. It can support traditional analog voice, so it comes from Η · 32χ The contents of G.728 / 9 can be converted to AD / PCM, and then transmitted to the circuit switch of Class 5 and terminated on the circuit-switched SS 7 network POTS line. Access equipment (talk control) From customers Provides connectivity and termination of conversations to NGN. As a hub for a variety of applications (video, voice, fax, web data and unified messaging, etc.) Provides system management and reporting capabilities. Can provide applications Program multiplexing (allows multiple applications to be accessed at the same time) Smart Peripheral (Media Control) Provides services such as DTMF analysis, voice prompts, messages, accent recognition, text-to-speech, and text-to-fax etc. Protocol changes ( Decision management) Receive conversation requirements from the rule database. Select and execute the required filters to initiate activities, and process and release conversations. Communicate with the existing CORE network to process information on NGN / extended CORE. The signal is filtered and converted from SS7 / ISDN to TCP / IP / H.32 3 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 45 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ -------- 1 ---- Order --------- line jjjp (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by A7, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Description of the invention (υμ ^) Conversion of signal data from one format to another (for example, from G.72 8/9 to AD / PCM, or from Vocaltec to Vienna system, etc.) Network access control point (Talk Control) Similar to SS7 Circuit Switched Network A switching node on the road. The first or last access point in the network. Provides the actual connection / talk processing, routing and processing procedures according to instructions from the rule database server. Chat manager / event recorder ( (Conversation Control) This process or application is important because it is the "adhesive" between the end-user application and the communication network. It needs to collect and assign end-user conversation references, application requirements, access device capabilities, and account policy information to the required IN-enabled components. In summary, its main functions are: Establishing AMA / CDR and other usage records. Interface with external third-party network gateways. Get in touch with the clearing house and staggered network location registers. Supply financial infrastructure Staggered network (roaming) location register (decision management) Similar to the main location registration in the wireless / cellular telephone world. This feature provides the policies needed to control users who access third-party networks across geographic boundaries. It is in constant contact with network location registers that distribute inter-connected networks, account exchanges, service feature data, and area and roaming user control data. 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 46

Moderate ruler length 97 2 X 10 2 / | \ Standard 4) AS) N (C quasi standard bidder 1226164 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention (ψα) "New Core" network Most of the "new core" attributes of the road architecture are part of NGN. These include all the intelligent components of the above-mentioned packetized NGN. The emergence of the new core architecture has reached the time limit of the traditional PSTN network infrastructure. Traditional The PSTN network architecture can not be removed from the public network, it can continue to exist as a comprehensive and accessible telex communication service, which can be acquired and adjusted by government agencies at high prices (AMTRAK model). For the purpose of technological innovation, the traditional PSTN network has become unimportant. With the decline of the PSTN-type access method, the entire IP-type access method is presented in the new core architecture, and all its terminal elements connected to the new core All are IP-enabled. All existing wired access methods (xDSL, T-ΐ, T-3, and fiber, etc.) will continue to provide access to IP-based services via the new core. New access technologies (eg, po wer-line approach) will emerge, but still use the same packet capabilities in the new core. The trend observed in NGN continues with increased broadband access. Other access methods (cable, satellite, and wireless) ) Will also complete the transition to the new core architecture. For complete services, these will become IP-enabled access technologies using the new core, thereby truly providing seamless services for many different access technologies. Wireless data network architecture The current wireless "core" network includes wireless access and roaming capabilities' which can interoperate with the wired PSTN core infrastructure to provide interoperable PSTN services. When the PSTN is transferred to NGN and the new core 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 47 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation—I—Order ------- --Line up · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 1226164 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (knee) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Basics of wireless PSTN access The architecture will also be transferred and connected to NGN and Core to provide wireless PSTN access services when using the new capabilities provided by NGN and new cores. Innovations will also occur in wireless terminal devices, enabling them to become IP-enabled and allow wired IP-based The mobility of service capabilities (such as the ability to access data and send and receive email) will generate more innovation. Due to the traditional characteristics of wireless infrastructure. These methods of wireless access to new cores are due to the old nature of wireless infrastructure. Limited to lower transmission speeds, however, new broadband wireless access will emerge to provide new IP-enabled wireless components that can provide broadband services via wireless / motorized components. In Europe, technically significant improvements, such as GSM, have provided vision for certain NGN and new CORE capabilities, such as 300KB of access bandwidth to pass information to handheld wireless components. At this stage, when combined with the intelligent capabilities of NGN and the new CORE backbone, the potential of combining these capabilities with the power of traditional wireless communications (such as roaming and digital error handling) seems unlimited. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. LMDS is a technology emerging in regional high-speed wireless access. It uses 25-3 5 GHz microwave spectrum for point-to-point and point-to-multipoint communication. End users can share the antenna connected to the digital receiver, and the digital receiver is connected to a channel block (c h a η n e 1 b a n k). The application server serves as the interface between its voice (PBX), video (CODEC), or data (router or switch) via the channel block and NGN. The conversation starts with the application that interacts with the server to request authentication (AAA), and then routes the connection through the NGN components such as the gateway and the switch, and the originator and the destination application Establish a conversation. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 48 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 male 1) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (called "combined satellite data network architecture in addition to wireless access infrastructure In addition, new service providers have appeared to try to use low earth orbiting satellites (LEOS) to build new access technologies and backbone network infrastructures. These early networks were built using traditional PSTN service models. Therefore, the bandwidth expansion of data services is lacking. In the new core, these will be transferred to the new packet-switched broadband LEO infrastructure, which provides high-speed access and high-speed backbone in the packet-type NGN and new core. Satellite-type broadband storage The access mechanism is also very suitable for the development of multipoint services on the new core. Cable network architecture Cable networks have evolved into the main broadband broadcast of analog video entertainment services. At present, the core cable infrastructure is suitable for unidirectional video broadcast. Services. Cable service providers are now upgrading their cable infrastructure to support high-speed Internet access. In the NGN scenario of the cable network, the cable will provide a new access mechanism for IP services, while using the current video broadcasting technology to transmit video content. Therefore, the IP attached to the NGN cable-based infrastructure Capable components will take advantage of all the new building blocks and capabilities described in wired NGN. This will result in seamless services between components accessed via wired or cable infrastructure. NGN cable infrastructure can utilize the same wired NGN components to provide IP-based telephone services, where wired NGN components can provide IP telephony to wired IP components. The digital network segment that interfaces with NGN includes a coaxial cable area loop that is connected to an implementation of the QAM / DPSK protocol Cable 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 49 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ------ --- Line printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (s0) Data Modulator. Coaxial Circuit The Ethernet cable modem terminates at the customer. The Ethernet cable modem sends the IP tone to the PC or application server. Applications (voice, video, data, etc.). The cable modem used provides users and applications with a wide range of bandwidth options from 2 to 10Mbits per second, its end-view hardware Configuration and equipment vendor selection. With the evolution of new cores in wired systems, cables continue to provide another broadband access mechanism for IP services. As the new core matures and strengthens its capabilities (about ten years), enabling it to provide high-speed real-time video content (providing the same quality as cable), it is expected that the cable architecture will become a full IP access Mechanism (as all wired access becomes an IP access mechanism). After that, the broadcast video content will be delivered to the components of the IP-enabled cable architecture of the power port, just like any other rich media is delivered through the IP network. It is conceivable that video coding technologies such as MPEG2 and motion JPEG will be further improved to use NGN and CORE transfer mechanisms on the cable infrastructure to deliver higher resolution digital media. The Internet has become more transparent, and applications and content have driven creativity in the process of creating services. PSTN-type services are also delivered to connected components via cable access, just as they are delivered to other wired connecting components on the new core. NGN creation strategy 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 50 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ----

1226164 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Invention Description (G () Network conversion design includes the following periods: Strategy-Market test-Service launch-Consolidation and optimization strategies determine the current network requirements Where to enter in the continuous evolution from the core to the NGN or new core. After determining the appropriate network location, choose an architecture solution that can best serve the company and the technology target. Market test launch A market test can measure and evaluate the agency The feasibility of the proposed service. In addition, this test makes the transition from a specific part of the infrastructure to NGN and the new core effective and feasible. Market tests provide access standards, operations, key performance indicators, etc. to evaluate the success of market tests No. Service development, planning, and management can be used to develop detailed network, system, process, and program management for the new core of the network based on the above development strategy. This ensures the planning and development of the network system Can be prepared in the future. 00S and back-office systems can support the new The process of service creation and management in mind. The network creation process provides program management tools to ensure that the creation can be successfully performed. These include the entry and exit standards for network creation, as well as KPIs for quality management, program planning and management Tools. Consolidation and optimization of services 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------------- ---- Order --------- Line ίΐι (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (ζ) When the network operator turns to operate and maintain NGN, While these services and capabilities will develop for NGN, there will be many co-existing market-driven processes. The network creation process provides tools to help customers improve the efficiency of these parallel processes. These optimization efforts will include organizations that drive change Process and technology to create efficiency based on consolidation of processes, and a variety of measurement tools to determine the success of this consolidation process. Network architecture maps and enterprise blueprints will be used as the basis In order to ensure that NGN maintains the necessary structural engineering during the consolidation period, and supports it for a long time. Now that the details about NGN have been proposed, now when the service quality declines, information related to charging will be presented. The degraded quality of service and accounting A typical telex communication network includes multiple telex communication switches that distribute a geographic area. When a user dials a phone, the telephone connection is relayed / routed through one or more switches before reaching the destination. Figure 1A shows an example of a telex system 102 across the United States. For convenience of explanation, the caller 104 dials from Los Angeles, California to the other party 112 in New York City, New York. This call connection is usually transmitted through three switches: Los Angeles, California, 106 'Chicago, Illinois, 108 and New York, NY, 1 ° In this scenario, the initial switch is Los Angeles, California Switch 106 'and the terminal switch is New York City, NY 110. Each switch 106-110 is connected to two or more Data Access Points (DAP) 116-120, such as the main 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW. Nine paper standards are applicable ^ Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 χ 297 mm) (Please read the phonetic notes on the back before filling out this page)-Install i! Order --------- Line-Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7_V. Invention Description 6¾) DAP 116-120 and standby DAP 116-120 ° DAP 116-120 is a facility for receiving information requests from switches 106-1 10 , And process the request and return the requested information to the requesting exchange 106-110. Switches 106-110 use information from DAP 116-120 to process connections over the network. When a connected call passes through one of the switches 106-110, the switch will generate a call log. This call log includes call information, which includes (but is not limited to): routing, billing documents, call characteristics, and troubleshooting. After the call is terminated, each switch 106-110 that handles the call completes the relevant call record. The switches 106-110 combine multiple call logs into a billing block. When an exchange 106-110 completes the billing block, the exchange 106-. 110 transmits the billing block to a billing center (billing cente 114). Therefore, the billing center 114 processes the call from each The exchangers 106-110 receive a billing block, in this example three billing blocks will be received. The billing center 114 searches each billing block and retrieves the call history related to the call, thereby retrieving it A call log for each switch 106-110 that handles the call. The billing center 114 then uses one or more retrieved call logs to generate a billing entry. The billing center 114 is also connected Go to each DAP 1 16-120 to retrieve the information about the switch 106-110 or the call log. However, the bill will also increase in the present invention because the hybrid network also contains proxy intelligence (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 53 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Consumer Cooperatives 5 Description of the Invention (Training) FIG. 1B is a block diagram of a network data management 130 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The network data management 130 includes usage data and events for the purpose of network performance and traffic analysis. This information can be entered in the service management account (level and discount) process, which depends on the service and its structure. This process provides sufficient and relevant information to verify service level agreements (Service Level Agreements) (SLA) is compatible / non-compatible. This process also provides sufficient usage information for levels and accounting. This process ensures that network performance goals can be tracked, and when non-compliance (exceeds critical threshold, performance degradation), Notifications can be issued. This also includes critical thresholds and specific needs of the account. This includes information on capacity, usage, traffic, and usage collection. In some cases, for the purpose of flow control, changes in traffic conditions can stimulate changes in the network . Decreasing the level of network capacity will cause more resources to be requested from the network plan. Figure 1B-1 shows a flowchart to show the basis A network data management program according to a preferred embodiment of the invention. First, at step 150, data on usage and events occurring on a converged network will be collected. Then, at step 152, the data is then analyzed to determine The status of the combined network. Then step 154 is performed, and the data is used when managing the combined network. Finally, at step 156, the billing rate and discount will be determined based on the status of the combined network. In addition to network data management In addition to generating billing events, the present invention also uses the customer interface management program 132, as shown in Section 1C, to directly interact with customers, and translate customer requests and inquiries into appropriate "events 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 54 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ I ------ 丨 Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (0), such as the generation of order or problem bill, or bill adjustment. This procedure records customer contact information, directly inquires the appropriate manufacturer, and tracks the completion status. In these examples of customers directly accessing the service management system, the program ensures the consistency of the image across the system 'and ensures security to prevent customers from harming the Internet or other customers. The goal is to provide meaningful and immediate customer contact experiences that customers often demand. Figure 1C-1 is a flowchart showing a customer interface management procedure according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First at step 158, the network customer receives a service level agreement. The service level is then stored in step 160. Thereafter, at step 162, an inquiry from the internet customer is received to reflect the occurrence of events related to the coupled network. Then, in step 164, a corresponding case is generated according to the customer inquiry and the service level agreement. The network data management 130 and the customer interface management program 132 are used to provide information to the customer service quality management program 134, as shown in FIG. 1D. Customer service quality management procedures 134 include the monitoring, management, and reporting of service quality as defined in service descriptions, service level agreements (SLAs), and other service-related documents. It includes network performance, but also includes performance presented by service parameters such as instant order fulfillment. The output of this program is standard (scheduled) and exception reports, which include forms. Printed by the consumer co-operatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (dashb 〇ard), service performance for SLAs, reports of any development capacity issues, and customer usage patterns Report, etc. In addition, this procedure responds to performance inquiries from customers. For SLA violations, this procedure supports notification problem handling, and for QoS violations, notification of quality of service management136. The goal is to provide effective monitoring. Monitoring and reporting must be provided on the provided service 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 55 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (outside) service parameters Meaningful and timely performance information for SP management and customers. This goal is also used to manage service levels that meet specific SLA appointments and standard service appointments. 1D-1 is a flowchart showing a customer service quality management procedure according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First, in step 166, a composite network event is received, which may include customer inquiries, demand reports, completion notifications, service quality items, service level agreement (SLA) items, service problem data, quality data, network performance data, and / Or network configuration data. Then at step 168, the system decides which customer report to generate. At step 170, a customer report is generated based on the received event. FIG. 1E illustrates a block diagram of Service Quality Management 136 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The service quality management process 136 supports monitoring service or product quality on a service level basis to be able to determine: • Whether the service levels are consistent. • Are there any general questions about the service or product. • Whether sales and usage of services can be tracked to predict. This process also includes taking appropriate action to maintain the service level for each service level within the goals of the agreement, and also to keep demand ahead or issue warnings to the sales process to slow sales. The goal is to provide effective service-specific monitoring and management, as well as meaningful and real-time performance information on the parameters of specific services. This goal is also used to manage service levels that meet SL A and standard service appointments for a particular service. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 56 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (q) Figure .1E-1 is a flowchart showing the service quality management procedure according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention. First in step 172, a combined network event is received, which may include predictions, quality targets, available capacity, service problem data, service quality violations, performance trends, usage trends, problem trends, maintenance activities, maintenance processes, and / or Credit breaches and more. Then in step 174, the quality management network data is determined. At step 176, quality management network data is generated. The above quality management network data may include specification data, capacity data, service level quality data, service correction recommendations, additional capacity requirements, performance requirements, and / or usage requirements. Finally, in step 178, a network procedure is confirmed to transmit the generated data. FIG. 1F illustrates a block diagram of the problem processing program 138. The problem handling program 138 receives information from the customer interface management program 132 and the customer service quality management program 134. It is used to receive service complaints from customers, solve problems to satisfy customers, and provide meaningful status for repair or response activities. This procedure is also responsible for any issues affecting the service, including: • Notifying customers in the event of an outage (whether or not notified by the customer). • Solve problems to satisfy customers. • Provide meaningful status for repair or response activities. This professional action management also includes the expected maintenance shutdown period. The goal is to identify and communicate the vast majority of issues with customers, provide meaningful status, and resolve in the shortest time.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back first? Matters write this page) Binding · --Line · A7 1226164 B7 ^ ---------~-'' V. Description of the Invention (%) Figure 1F-1 is a flowchart showing a problem management program according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First at step 180, the system receives a notification of a problem in the coupled network. Then, in step 182, a solution to this problem in the coupled network is decided. This solution can include status reports, resolution notifications, problem reports, service reorganizations, problem notifications, service level agreement violations, and / or notifications of outages. Finally, at step 184, the implementation of the solution is tracked. The problem processing program 138 and the network data management 130 obtain information to the level evaluation and discount program 140, as shown in FIG. 1G. Based on the required customer-to-customer benchmarks, this procedure applies the correct rating assessment rules to the usage data. It also applies any agreed discounts to part of the ordering process as a way to promote discounts, charges and discontinuation periods. In addition, because the service level agreement does not comply, the level assessment and discount program 140 applies to any discounts that should be paid. The goal is to correctly rate the use and proper use of discounts, promotions, and credit. Figure 1G-1 is a flow chart showing a rating evaluation and discount procedure according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First, in step 185, the customer's usage information is received. In step 186, network service level agreement violations are collected. Step 187: The rating evaluation and discount system receives a violation of the quality of the Internet service. Then in step 188, the evaluation rules are applied to the online customer usage information. In step 189, the negotiated discount is determined based on the violation of the quality of the network service. At step 190, a refund is determined based on the network service level agreement violation. Then in step 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 58 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) | Installation ---- ---- Order --------- line | Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 1226164 B7__ V. Invention Description (^) 191, providing accounts that reflect usage information, negotiate discounts and refunds Information to generate customer invoices. Using the information from the rating evaluation and discount process 140, the invoice and collection process 142 shown in Figure 1 Η generates the correct billing information. This process includes sending invoices to customers, processing payments and collecting payments. In addition, the program handles customer inquiries regarding billing and is responsible for resolving billing issues to meet customer satisfaction. The goal is to provide the correct billing, and if there is a problem with the billing, the customer can be quickly resolved in the proper state. Another additional goal is for service providers to collect money in a professional and customer-oriented manner. Figures 1Η-1 are a flowchart showing an invoice and collection procedure according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. First at step 192, the system receives a customer account inquiry and customer payment information. Then in step 193, billing information, including discounts due to violations of service quality and refunds due to violations of service level agreements are collected and processed. In step 194, a customer account invoice is generated based on the customer payment information and billing information and transmitted. Event recorders and event managers provide arbitration and activity tracking. Event recorders and event managers use personally defined rule databases to obtain grade assessments and account information for service degradation. Use the expert system to analyze and notify the events generated by each customer, event driver, collector, and system to make appropriate capacity planning. When a notification event is received, the system analyzes the event and uses it to authenticate the customer. If the customer encounters a non-affecting incident that infringes on the customer contract, the notification event is also used to provide the customer with a deductible account in the future. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 59 Li) ------------ 1 -install --- (please read the notes on the back to write this page) line. Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau employee consumer cooperatives printed B7___ V. Invention Description (G〇) Certificate. In addition to the system itself generating notification events, the customer can also directly notify the service provider in the event of such events. Figure 2A is a flowchart illustrating media communication through the coupled network of the present invention. When a customer starts using a hybrid network, the hybrid network first uses IP information to transfer media on the network in step 220 to route to the appropriate destination. The media transferred on the Internet can be phone data, video data, or any other data that can be transmitted by packet exchange. In a second step 222, an event is generated based on the quality of service of the media transmission. As previously described in Figures 1D and 1E, these events include notifications of performance violations of the SLA and events generated by customers from the customer interface management program 132. In a third step 224, the event generated in step 222 is used to generate a customer's bill. In addition to the general billing of services provided by the affiliate network, the billing is corrected based on events that occur during media transmission. For example, a representative SLA violation event is used to give a customer a voucher that can be debited later. As discussed in Figures 1F, 1G, and 1 above, the problem handling program 138 is responsible for receiving service complaints and other issues affecting the service. Together with the network data management 130, the problem handling program obtains the data to the discount program 140. Based on the customer-to-customer-oriented benchmark, the discount program 140 uses the correct rating evaluation rules and discounts such as discontinuation of use and other SLA violations. Finally, the invoice and collection process 142 uses the information from the discount process 140 to generate customer billing information. In order to better understand the present invention, it is quite helpful to describe some other proper terms related to the telecom network. A phone call into located

4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation-- (Please read the precautions on the back first This page} Order: Φ-line · 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (w) The switch on the transmission line called originating port or trunk. The originating port is entered from the same starting position One of the many transmission lines in the switch. This group of ports is the starting trunk group. After processing an incoming call, the switch sends the call to the ~ destination, which can be another switch , Regional exchange telephone company 'or private branch exchange. The call is transmitted through a transmission line called a terminal port (tefminating port) or trunk. Similar to the initial 璋' terminal port is one of the port groups from the switch to the same destination This port group is the terminal backbone group. At present, the telex communication network provides customers with the ability to use the general public network and to define the customer's virtual network (Vnet). VNet, customers can define private dial-up plans Including the planned number of telephones, etc. Vnet customers are not limited to the number of telephones that are configured to the public telex communication system in a specific geographic area. They can define the number of customer telephones themselves. During the processing of a telephone call, the switch must generate a call The record 'is large enough to include all the information needed for the call. However, the' call record 'may not be so large that the fields of most call records are unused in normal calls. In this case, the stored call Recording wastes a lot of storage space, and transmitting this call record will also cause unnecessary transmission. A solution for generating and processing call records is implemented in a fixed length call record format, such as 32-word Call records. One character is two bytes (byte) or 16 bits (bit). However, 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 61 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 male) (Li) -------------- Install --- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters HI write this page) Printed by the cooperative 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (bi) A fixed-length call record format cannot be expanded with the implementation of new call features. More importantly, when the telex communication network The road becomes more and more complicated by adding many new features and phone numbers, and fixed call records cannot handle the expanded data fields. The current fixed-length call record format includes time-point fields that record the time of the area in three-second increments. 'Where the regional switch time represents the time on the day of the switch. The point-in-time field is used by network switches, billing centers, and other network subsystems. However, each time the system needs this time interval in a different format for different uses, such as the epoch time format. The meta-period time is the number of times with one second as the increment starting from a special date and time in history. For example, billing centers need meta-period time for billing records, while exchanger reporting and error loggers require regional exchanger time. Another problem arises when using only the area switch time, that is, the time change caused by the light saving time cannot be adjusted. In addition, each secondary system requires finer tuning time than is currently possible in three-second increments. With just three seconds of the regional switch time provided, the switch will pass the burden of converting the time into a usable format to the network subsystem. The fixed call log format cannot adjust the needs of various time intervals' because it only includes the time interval of the regional switch time with lower order accuracy. Due to the nature of the fixed length format, the fixed call record format cannot be extended to include different time formats, let alone fine-tune time in one second increments.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male f) ------------------- Order ---- ----- Wire (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ((3¾) Therefore, for the telecom network switch, it needs to be more flexible And expandable format to store call log information. In addition, it is necessary to provide a flexible format to provide time-stops in one-second increments so that it can easily and efficiently respond to the effects of daylight saving time and time zone changes. In addition, all call records need to be matched to a specific telephone call. For example, for correct billing and cost control, the billing center must match the call records of the originating switch with the call records of the terminal switch. In addition, for the purpose of troubleshooting and security, it also needs to be able to easily track specific phone calls through the network in order to isolate the problem area. Therefore, for the switch of the telex communication network, it must be able to Uniquely identify In each through the phone network transmission, thereby accurately identify all the identified call records associated with a particular telephone call. EXAMPLE call record format (Call Record Format) embodiment

An embodiment is provided here, which can solve the problem by providing a flexible and extensible call record format, which is also an implementation of both a small and a large call record format. In particular, this embodiment is implemented by a preset 32-character call record format plus an expandable 64-character call record format. This embodiment uses a 32-character call log format to record a typical telephone call, and when additional information related to the call is needed, a 64-character call log format is used. This embodiment provides the necessary flexibility to effectively manage the change data of a given telephony. 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --- --------- Equipment --- (Please read the note on the back ^^ write this page) Order: Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (bw request. New call features can be developed and simply incorporated into the variable call record format of the present invention. This embodiment also records the time point of each meta-period time format. This implementation For example, the start time of a phone call is recorded in the meta-period time format, and the remaining time points are the offset 値 or seconds of the start time. This embodiment also solves the problem of conversion between time saving and daylight saving because daylight saving time It is the regional time offset 値, which does not affect the meta-period time. In addition, in the call log format, when the time point of using the meta-period format is compared with the time of using the regional exchanger, fewer records are required. The meta-period time format can represent coordinated universal time (UTC), which was decided by Greenwich in the United Kingdom 'it has a time zone with a zone converter time or other time 0. The meta-period time is only a format, and Must not be used by UTC. The billing time and regional converter time can be UTC or local time, and the regional converter time may not be the same as the billing time. Therefore, the exchange must be kept separately. Single time and regional switch time to avoid problems during * light saving time change. Network Call Identifier This embodiment solves this problem by providing a unique identifier to each call record. The problem of uniquely identifying each call and identifying all call records for a particular phone. It generates a network call identifier (NCID), which is assigned to each call record at the origin of the call That is, the initial switch generates an NCID for each call record. The NCID is transmitted by telex along with the related telephone call.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --- ------ line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description ((^) End point. Therefore, at any point on the network where a phone call is made, the relevant NCID will identify the starting point and time of the phone call. Each switch that the phone call passes through will record the NCID in the call associated with the call In the record. The NCID is very small enough to be placed in the 32-character call record to reduce the data throughput and storage space. The NCID provides the billing center and other network subsystems with the ability to match a specific call Record of initial call with the terminal. This embodiment also provides the ability of the switch to discard the received NCID and generate a new NCID. When the received NCID format is invalid or unreliable, the switch can discard the received NCID, thereby For every communication sent over the network The telephone ensures a valid and unique identification code. For example, the NCID generated by a third-party switch in a telex communication network is considered to be unreliable. This embodiment relates to a switch of a telex communication network and its use Flexible and extensible call record format to generate call records. Call record formats include small (preferably 32-character) and large (preferably 64-character) extensible formats. Familiar with related skills Everyone knows that large and small call record formats with different sizes can be implemented together. This embodiment also relates to the switch of the telex communication network, which generates a unique NCID for each call transmitted over the network. The NCID provides a mechanism for To match all call records related to a particular call. Those skilled in the art know how to implement call record identifiers in different formats.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 65 Read the notes on the back first

The page size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Computer software running on a computer system. FIG. 2B shows an exemplary diagram of a computer system. Computer system 202 includes one or more processors, such as processor 204. The processor 204 is connected to a communication bus 206. The computer system 202 also includes a main memory 208, preferably a random access memory (RAM) and a secondary memory 210. The secondary memory 210 includes, for example, hard disks 2 12 and 7 or removable storage disks 214, such as a floppy disk drive, a tape drive, and an optical disk drive. Removable storage disks 214 read and / or write from removable storage unit 216 are well known. The removable storage unit 216, which is also called a program storage element or a computer program product, represents a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape, and an optical disk. The removable storage unit 216 includes a computer-usable storage medium in which computer software and / or data is stored. Computer programs (also known as computer control logic) are stored in the main memory 208 and / or the secondary memory 210. When this computer program is executed, the computer system 202 is activated to perform the various functions of the invention described herein. In particular, when a computer program is executed, the processor 204 is activated to perform various functions of the present invention. Therefore, this computer program represents the controller of the computer system 202. Another embodiment is a computer program product that includes a computer-readable medium in which control logic (computer software) is stored. When the processor 204 executes control logic, the processor performs various functions described herein.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Line-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 Factory _B7___ V. Description of Invention (β) Another embodiment is mainly implemented on hardware, such as using a hardware state machine. The implementation of a hardware state machine to perform the described functions is easy to implement for those skilled in the relevant art. Call Record Formats This embodiment provides 9 different call record formats to the switches of the telex communication network. These records include Call Detail Record (CDR), Extended Call Detail Record (ECDR), Private Network Record (PNR), Extended Private Network Record (Expanded Private Network Record, EPNR), Operator Service Record (OS R), Extended Operator Service Record (EOSR), Private Operator Service Record (POSR), Extended Private Operator Service Record (Expanded Private Operator Service Record »EPOSR) and Switch Event Record (SER). Each record is 32 characters long, and each record of the extended version is 64 characters long. Exemplary embodiments of the nine call record formats discussed herein are further described in Figs. The call record embodiment of the present invention includes two call record formats of 32-character and 64-character. It is easy for those skilled in the art to develop another embodiment of the call record with different number of characters and different field definitions. Figure 3 shows the call record format of CDR and P N R. Figures 4A and 4B show 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 67 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

Order:; Line: 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (Secret) Call record format of ECDR and EPNR. Figure 5 shows the call record format of OSR and POSR. Figures 6A and 6B show the call record format of EOSR and EPOSR. Figure 7 shows the SER call log format. The CDR and PNR and the derived ECDR and EPNR are standard call record formats, including information about general telephone calls passing through the switch. The CDR is for non-VNET customers, and the PNR format is for VNET customers. It is generated by the switch that initiated the VNET call. With the exception of some specific fields described below, the fields of the two call logs are almost equal. OSR and POSR and derived EOSR and EPOSR include information about telephone calls that require the assistance of the switchboard, which is generated by the switch or a system that actually has switchboard personnel. The switch completes an OSR for non-VNET customers and a POSR for private VNET customers. These call records are only available on switches or systems that have the ability to perform switchboard service or network audio response system (NARS) functions. produce. With some specific fields described below, the fields in these two call log formats are almost equal. SER is reserved for special events, such as hourly pass marks, time changes, system responses, and billing blocks in the trailing field. The SER record format is described in more detail below. Figures 8A and 8 B. are used together to show the logic used by the switch to determine when to use the extended call log format. A call 202 enters the switch 106-110 (referred to as CCCC 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 68 for reference convenience. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---- ---------------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ^ 226164 A7 ____ 2Z-- 5. Description of the invention (BH) switch, the switch in progress refers to the switch that is currently processing the call. At this moment, the switch 106-110 decides what call records and what call record format (small / default or large / extended) to be A call log format used to record this call. In this regard, the switch 106-110 will perform nine checks when it receives 802 every call. Switches 106-110 use an extended record for calls 802 that pass any inspection and pass any combination of inspections. The first check 8 04 determines whether the call 106-110 has a direct termination overflow (DTO) in progress. For example, DT0 is generated when a customer dials a phone number 802 to a telephone number 800 and the original destination of the telephone number 800 is busy. If the original destination is busy, the switch overflows the phone 802 to a new destination. In this case, the switch must record the number of times the destination was originally tried, the final destination of the phone 802, and the overflow. Therefore, if the telephone call 802 involves DTO, the exchangers 106-1 10 must complete the extended records (ECDR, EPNR, E0SR, EP0SR) 816. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The second check by the exchange 106-110 on the call 8 02 is to determine whether the call position of the call 802 is greater than 10 digits. The call location is the telephone number at the 802 location where the call originated. An example of an international call is a minimum of 11 digits. If the dialing position is greater than 10 digits, the switch records the telephone number of the dialing position in the extended record format (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 816. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 69 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The third check 80 8 is performed on call 8 02 to determine whether the destination address is greater than 17 digits. The destination address is the number of the location to be connected, and can be a phone number or a trunk group. If the destination address is greater than 17 digits, the switch records this destination in extended record format (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 816. Switch 106-1 10 performs a fourth check 8 10 on telephone 8 02 to determine whether the pre-translated digit field is used with a switchboard assistance service call. If the call 202 must be translated to another number in the network, the number of digits to be translated in advance is the number of the phone 802 dialed by the caller. Therefore, when the caller uses the switchboard service, the switches 106-110 record this dialing in the extended record format (E0SR, EP0SR) 816. When the fifth check 812 is performed on the telephone 802, the exchangers 106-110 determine whether the number of digits before the conversion of the telephone 802 dialed by the dialer without the assistance of the switchboard is greater than 10 digits. If the number of digits before conversion is greater than 10 digits, the switches 106-110 record the dialing in extended record format (ECDR, EPNR) 816. When the sixth check 814 is performed on the phone 802, the exchangers 106-110 decide whether the data recorded in the Authorization Code field of the call log including the auxiliary data exceeds 22 digits. The authorization code field refers to the party who did not receive the phone bill, such as the call location or credit card call. If the data requires more than 22 digits, the exchanger

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------.— I ---- Order ---- ----- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 _B7_

V. Description of Invention J EPNR > EOSR > EPOSR) 816 records this billing information. When the seventh check 820 is performed on the phone 802, the switches 106-110 determine whether the phone 802 is a wideband call. Broadband calls are phones that require multiple transmission lines or channels. For example, a general video call requires 6 transmission channels. One for voice and the other five for video transmission. The more transmission channels used during a broadband call, the better the reception quality will be. The current telex communication system provides a maximum of 24 channels. Therefore, to indicate which or how many channels are used in a wideband call, the switch 106-1 10 records this channel information in an extended record format (ECDR, EPNR) 82 8. During the eighth check 8-22 of the telephone 802, the switches 106-110 decide whether or not to change the time and use the characteristics for use by the switchboard. Time and change characteristics It is generally used when a hotel guest uses the switchboard to assist in making a call and recording the call 802 into his room. After the call 8 02 is completed, the switchboard informs the hotel guest of the cost of the call 8 02. If the time and change characteristics are used during a call, the switches 106-110 record the hotel customer name and room number in an extended record format (EOSR, EP0SR) 8 3 2. The switch 106-110 performs a ninth check 824 on the phone 802, that is, a final check to determine whether the call 802 is for an enhanced voice service / network audio response system (EVS / NARS) call. EVS / NAVRS is an audio menu system that allows customers to make selections via phone buttons based on an automatic voice menu. This system includes a NARS switch located on the voice menu system. Because 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 71 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back first ¾ fill out this page) ci · Order · Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the employee consumer cooperative 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (qz) Therefore, when using EVS / NARS call 802, the NARS switch 10 6-110 records the customer's menu selection in an extended record format (EOSR, EPOSR) 832. If there is no positive result from the check 8 04-8 24, the switch 106-1 10 uses the preset recording format (OSR, POSR) 83 0 ° Once the call is checked, the switch 106-110 will generate and Complete the appropriate call log. Call records are recorded in binary and telephone binary to decimal (TBCD) format. The format of TBCD is as follows: 0000 = TBCD-Null 0001 = digit 1 0010 = digit 2 0011 = digit 3 0100 = digit 4 0 1 0 1 = digit 5 0110 = digit 6 Employee of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Consumer Cooperatives 01 1 1 = Digits 7 1 000 = Digits 8 1001 = Digits 9 1010 = Digits 0 1011 = Special Digits 1 (DTMF Digits A) 1100 = Special Digits 2 (DTMF Digits B ) 1101 = Special digits 3 (DTMF digits C) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 72 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (y3) 1110 = Special digit 4 (DTMF digit D) 1111 = Special digit 5 (unused) Before the data is recorded, 'all TB c D digit fields must be entered TB CD-Null or 0. Where applicable, the dial-digit format follows these conventions: N = Digits 2-9 X = Digits 0-9 γ = Digits 2-8 So, if the call log field specification contains 1 ^ 'valid field Bits are 2-9. Every call record except the SER contains a specific time point field for the call. The time point field is recorded in meta-time format. Metaperiod time is calculated in one second increments from a specific date / time in history. The embodiment of the present invention uses the date / time of midnight (00:00:00 am UTC) on January 1, 1976, but this is only used as an illustration and is not intended to limit the implementation of the present invention. Those skilled in this art can easily choose another date / time as the starting point of the meta-time. In the record, time point 1 represents the meta-period time of the start time of the conversation 802. The other time points stored in the record are seconds after time point 1; that is, the offset from time point 1 when a particular time point occurs 値. Before any data is recorded, all time-point fields must be entered with "〇". Therefore, if it occurs at a point in time, its count is a number of 1 or more. In addition, when the time exceeds the limit range, the time point count excluding time point 1 will not count over, but will stay at the maximum count 最大.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --- 11 --- Order --------- line (Please read the Note: Please fill in this page again.) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (%) The converter clock reflects the converter time in the area and is expressed as all time except the bill. The billing information is recorded in time, in this embodiment UTC. Time offset is a number that reflects the time of the converter relative to -UTC, that is, the offset due to time zone and daylight saving time changes. When calculating the change in time relative to UTC, three factors must be considered. First, there are time zones on both sides of UTC, so there are positive offsets and negative offsets. Second, the time zone offset 値 counts down from zero (UK, Greenwich) from east to the international date line. At the international day change line, the date changes to the next day, so that the offset 値 becomes positive and starts counting down until it returns to the zero offset of Greenwich. Third, the time zone interval in many regions of the world is not exactly one hour apart. For example, Australia has a time zone with a time difference of 30 minutes between the two time zones on either side of it, while in North India there is a time zone that differs from the time zone next door by 15 minutes. Therefore, the time offset of the call log must consider the 15-minute positive and negative offset. Embodiments of the present invention can meet this need by providing a positive and negative time offset 正 in one minute increments. There are two calculation formulas used to convert the time of the regional exchanger and the meta-period. (i) Meta-period time + (sign bit * time offset) = regional exchange time (ii) Regional exchange time-(sign bit * time offset) = meta-period time converter uses the number 値 to shift the time 値Recorded in the SER, where the number 代表 1 represents 1 minute and the time offset 计算 is calculated in seconds, and is added to each area time point 1 before being recorded in the call log. For example, Central Standard Time is 6 hours ahead of UTC. In this case

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 74 (Please read the notes on the back first \ ^ Write this page) I · --- 1 ---- Order --------- Line Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (79, the sign bit (Sign Bit) represents a negative offset of "1" 値And the time offset recorded in the SER < is 3 60 (6 hours * 60 minutes / hour = 360 minutes). Please refer to Figure 5 for a more detailed SER record format. When recording time points in the call record format At 1, the switch multiplies the time offset by 60, because there are 60 seconds per minute, and it determines whether the offset 値 is positive or negative 检验 by checking the sign bit. In this example, the calculated number 値It is -21,600 (-1 * 360 minutes * 60 seconds / minute). Using the formula (ii) above, if the regional exchanger time is midnight, the corresponding meta-period time should be 1,200,000,000. After removing the time offset 値 -2 1,600, you can get the correct meta-period time of 1,200,02 1,600 seconds, which is six hours after midnight the next day of meta-period time. This embodiment also works in the same way for a switch with a positive time offset 格林 in Greenwich East. Two commands are used when the time changes. First, Figure 9 shows the change of time command 900. Control flow, which changes the time and time offset of the regional switch. In Figure 9, after the switchboard enters the time change command, the switch proceeds to step 902, and prompts the regional exchange between the switchboard and UTC time. Switch time and time offset 値. In step 902, the switchboard switchboard enters a new regional switch time and time offset 値. Then, in step 904, the new time and time offset 値 appear here to the switchboard switchboard. Then proceed to step 906. Before the switch changes the correct time and offset 値, the switchboard switchboard must verify the entered time and time shift 输入. If the switchboard switchboard confirms these changes in step 906, the switchover proceeds to step 908, and generate a SER with Event Qualifier equal to 2, which is used to confirm that it has been applied to 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 75 China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page first) · I I 1 Order ---------

1226164 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention Q6) The zone time and time offset of the switch are changed. The billing center uses SER as a billing program. The switch then proceeds to step 910 and leaves this command. Please refer to step 906 again. If the switchboard does not verify these changes, the switch then executes step 910 and leaves this command without updating the zone switch time and time offset 値. Please refer to Figure 5 for more SER information. Fig. 10 shows the control flow of the daylight saving time command 1000, which is the second command to change the time. In Fig. 10, after the switchboard switchboard enters the change daylight saving time command, the switchboard enters step 1 002 and prompts the switchboard switchboard to select the forward or backward time change. Then proceed to step 1 004, the switchboard switchboard makes a choice. In step 1004, if the switchboard switchboard selects a forward command, the switch proceeds to step 1 006. In step 1 006, the switch sets the zone switch time one hour ahead and adds one hour (60 times) to the time offset 値. The switch then proceeds to step 1010. Refer to step 1 004. If the switchboard switch selects the backward option, the switch sets the zone switch time one hour back and reduces the time offset by one hour (count 60 times). The switch then proceeds to step 1010. At step 1010, the switchboard switcher must verify the forward or backward command options, the new zone switch time, and the time offset 値 before the actual time changes. If the switchboard switchboard confirms the new time and time offset 步骤 in step 1010, the switch executes step 1012 and generates a SER with event qualification equal to 9, which changes the zone switch time and time offset 値 of the switch. The switch then proceeds to step 1014 and leaves this command. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 76 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ^ installed --- (Please read the back (Notes on this page) Order:-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Online Economy 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (7?) Please refer to step 1010 again. If the switchboard does not confirm these changes, the switch then Execute step 1014 and leave this command without updating the regional switch time and time offset 値. After the successful completion of the daylight saving time command, the 'bill record' is affected by the new time offset. This embodiment allows the meta time as the billing time to be normally increased through the daylight saving time change procedure, but is not affected by changes in the time and time offset of the regional switch. Internet call identification code In one embodiment of the present invention, a unique NCID is provided for each call transmitted through a telex communication network. Therefore, the NCID is an independent identifier in all Internet calls. The ncid is transmitted and recorded at each switch associated with the call. The originating switch of a call generates an NCID. The NCID used in the preferred embodiment of the present invention is an 82-bit identification code, which includes the following secondary fields: i) starting switch ID (14 bits): this field represents the NCS switch ID, It is defined in the Office Engineering table of each switch. However, the SER call log contains an alphanumeric representation of the switch ID. Therefore, the switch uses the alphanumeric switch ID as an index to a database for the corresponding NCS switch ID. ii) Starting Trunk Group (14-bit): This field represents the starting trunk group as defined in the above 32 / 64-character call record format. iii) Start number (19 digits): This field represents the start number defined in the above 3 2 / 64-character call record format. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 77 The national paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) of this paper ruler (Please read the precautions on the back first @ • write this page)

II Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 _______ V. Description of the invention Of) iv) Time point 1 (32-bit): This field represents the definition in the above 32 / 64-character call record format Time point 1 v) Sequence Number (3 bits): This field represents the number of calls made at the same port number at the same time point 1 (second). The sequence number of the first call is set to "0". This number will increase with each successive call that starts at the same port number at the same time point. It is easy for those skilled in the art to generate a NCID in a different format. Each switch records the NCID in a 32-character or 64-character call log format. For the 32-character NCID, if the AuthCode filed is not used to record other information, the intermediate and terminal switch can record the NCID in the authorization code field of the 32-character call record. In this example, the starting switch ID is the NCS switch ID, not the alphanumeric switch ID as recorded in the SER call log. If the authorization code field is used to record other information, the intermediate and terminal switch will record the NCID in a 64-character call record format. In contrast, when the NCID is stored in a 32-character call log format, the originating switch does not use authorization codes to block. The second column of the start switch record NCID is located in the corresponding separate field in the 32-character call record. That is, the starting switch ID is stored in the switch ID of the SER call log with the alphanumeric switch iD; the starting trunk group is stored in the starting trunk group field of the 32-character call record format; Start & ^ is stored in the starting port number block of the 32-character call log format; hour__ 1 is stored in the time point 1 field of the 32-character call log format;

No. is stored in 3 2-character call record format NCID serial number_ 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW% This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the back Please fill in this page for the matters needing attention) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ----- 丨 Order --------------- 1 ^ 26164 A7 --5Z_ V. Description of the Invention (Μ) position. The 32-character call log also includes the NCID location (NCIDLOC) field, which is used to confirm when the NCID is recorded in the authorization code field of the call log. If the NCID position field contains "1", the authorization code field contains the NCID. If the NCID position field contains "〇", the NCID is stored in the separate secondary field in the call log. Because the initial switch stores the NCID in a separate field of the 32-character call record, only the middle and terminal switches set the NCID position field to "1". For the 64-character call log format, the extended call log includes a separate field, called the NCID field, to store the 82-bit NCID. This call log is handled in the same way, regardless of whether the originating, intermediate or terminating switch stores the NCID. In the 64-character call log format, the starting switch ID is the NCS switch ID, rather than the alphanumeric switch ID recorded in the SER call log. Fig. 11 shows the control flow of the call processing of the network call identifier switch. In step 1104, the call 202 enters the switches 106-110 (referred to as an ongoing switch for convenience of reference, the ongoing switch refers to the switch that is currently processing the call). In step 1104, the ongoing switch receives the call 202, and then proceeds to step 1106. At step 1106, the ongoing switch accesses a regional database and obtains the trunk group parameters related to the initial trunk group of the call 202. After obtaining the parameters, the switch in progress executes step U08. In step 1108, the switch in progress determines whether the NCID was received with call 202. Wakame 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 79 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Cooperative printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Consumer Cooperative, 1226164 A7 ^^ ______ B7___ Five N Invention Description c? O) The previous switch did not receive the NCID with call 202, and the switch then performs step 1112. In step 1112, the switch analyzes the parameters of the starting trunk group to determine the form of the starting trunk group. If the initial trunk group is an InterMachine Trunk (IMT) or a release link trunk (RLT), the switch proceeds to step 1116. IMT is the backbone that connects two general telex communication switches, and RLT is the backbone that connects an intelligent services network (ISN) platform to a general telex communication network. When the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1116, the ongoing switch knows that it is not a starting switch and it has not received the NCID. In step 1116, the ongoing switch analyzes the initial trunk group parameters to determine whether it is authorized to generate an NCID for call 202. In step 1116, if the switch in progress is not authorized to generate an NCID for the call 202, the switch in progress proceeds to step 1118. When in step 1118, the switch in progress knows that it is not a start switch and it has not received an NCID, but is not authorized to generate an NCID. Therefore, in step 1118, the ongoing switch writes the call record related to this call 202 into the regional switch database, and executes step 1120. In step 1120, the exchange in progress sends the call 202 and its associated NCID via the network. Step 1 120 is explained in more detail below. Please refer to step 1116 again. If the ongoing switch is authorized to generate an NCID for the call 202, the ongoing switch then proceeds to step 1114. In step 1114, before proceeding to step 1136, the exchanger is 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 80. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------- --II --- I ---- Order---! —-Line ”(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) m 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (si) Generate a new NCID for call 2 02. In step 1136, the ongoing switch writes the NCID and the call record related to the call 202 into the regional switch database, and then proceeds to step 1120. In step 1120, the ongoing switch sends the call 202 and its associated NCID via the network. Step 1120 is explained in more detail below. Please refer to step 1112 again. If the in-progress switch decides that the initial trunk group form is not IMT or RLT, the in-progress switch performs step 1114. When step 1114 is performed, the in-progress switch knows that it is the starting switch, and must therefore generate an NCID for call 202. Steps 11 to 14 are explained in more detail below. After the NCID is generated in step 1114, the ongoing switch executes step 1 136 and writes the call history including the NCID and the call 202 related to the call 202 into the regional switch database. After writing the call record, the ongoing switch then proceeds to step 1120 to transmit the call and its associated NCID through the network. Step 1120 is described in more detail below.

Please refer to step 1108 again. If the ongoing switch decides that it receives the NCID with the call 202, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1110. In step 1110, the switch processes the received NCID. In step 1110, there are two possible outcomes. First, the switch in progress may decide not to keep the received NCID and perform steps 11 to 10 to generate a new NCID. Steps 11 to 10 are explained in more detail below. In step 1114, the exchanger can generate a new NCID 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW before executing step 1136. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Read the notes on the back and fill out this page)-Install! I order! I! ---

Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs l226l64

V. Description of the invention (ρ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to call 202. Step 1114 is also described in more detail below. In step 1 136, the switch in progress writes the call records related to the call 200 into the regional database. The switch in progress then executes step 1120 and transmits the call 202 and its associated NCID — via the network. Step 1 120 will also be described in more detail below. Please refer to step 1110 again. In progress, the switch can decide to keep the received NCID, so as to perform steps U 10 to 1 1 15. In step 1115, the exchange in progress adds the received NCID to the call log related to the call 202. Steps 1 1 10 and 1 1 15 are explained in more detail below. After step 1115, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1136 to write the call record related to the call 202 into the regional database. The switch in progress then proceeds to step 112 and transmits the call 202 and its associated NCID over the network. Step 1120 is described in more detail below. Figure 12 shows the control logic of step 1110 used to process the received NCID. When the ongoing switch determines that the NCID has been received with the call 202, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1 202 of step 1110. In step 1 202, the ongoing switch analyzes the parameters of the starting trunk group to determine the form of the starting trunk group. If the initial trunk group form is IMT or RLT, the switch in progress executes step 1212. When in step 1212, the ongoing switch learns that it is not the originating switch and receives the NCID of call 202. Therefore, in step 1212, the switch keeps the received NCID in progress, and leaves step 1110, so as to proceed to 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 82 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

· Line · 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (¾ ^) Step 1115 in line 11 After that, the exchange in progress stores the received NCID in the call log and transmits the call. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Please refer to steps 1 2 02 again. If the initial trunk group form is not IMT or RLT, the switch performs step 1204 in progress. In step 1204, the switch in progress determines whether the initial trunk group form is an Integrated Services User Parts Direct Access Line (ISUP DAL) or an integrated services digital network main interface (Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN PRI). ISUP is a signal protocol that allows information to be transmitted between switches as information parameters. The ISUP DAL printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is a backbone group, which is mainly shared by most online customers, but it can also be used by a single online customer for a dedicated line. In contrast, ISDN PRI is a backbone group, which is mainly used as a dedicated line for a single network customer, but it can also be shared by multiple network customers. Internet customers are individuals who rent network resources. In step 1204, if the ongoing switch determines that the backbone group format is not ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the ongoing switch executes step 1206. When in step 1206, the switch in progress knows that the received NCID was not generated by the switch in the telex communication network or the switch of the network customer. Therefore, in step 1206, the switch discards the received NCID in the process because it is not a reliable NCID. From step 1206, the ongoing switch leaves step 1110, so that step 1114 of FIG. 11 is continuously performed, wherein the ongoing switch generates a new NCID and transmits the NCID along with the call 202. 4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 83 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Ϊ226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description Please refer to step 1204 again. If the switch in progress determines that the initial trunk group form is ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, the switch in progress then proceeds to step 1208. When at step 1208, the switch knows that it is receiving an NCID from the customer backbone. Therefore, the ongoing switch analyzes the initial trunk group parameters to determine whether it is authorized to generate a new NCID for call 202. The switch in progress can be authorized to generate a new NCID and overwrite the NCID code provided by the customer to ensure that a valid NCID corresponding to the call 202 is transmitted over the network. In step 1 2 08, if the switch in progress is not authorized to generate a new NCID for the call 202, the switch in progress proceeds to step 1210. In steps 12-10, the exchange checks the validity of the received NCID, such as the NCID length. If the received NCID is invalid, the exchange proceeds to step 1206. In step 1206, the switch in progress discards the invalid NCID. From step 1 206, the ongoing switch leaves step 1110, so that step 1114 of FIG. 11 is continuously performed, where the ongoing switch generates a new NCID and transmits the NCID along with the call 202. Please refer to step 1210 again. If the switch in progress determines that the received NCID is valid, the switch in progress proceeds to step 1212. In step 1212, the ongoing switch keeps the received NCID, and leaves step 1110, so as to continue to step 1115 in FIG. 11, where the ongoing switch stores the received NCID in the call log, and then transmits the call. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 84 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation -------- Order-丨 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Ϊ226164

'Explanation of the Invention (#) FIG. 13A shows the control logic of step 1114 of generating an NCID. When the NCID needs to be generated, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1 3 02. In step 1 02, the exchange calculates a serial number in progress. The sequence number represents the number of calls that occurred at the same time point at the same port number. The first call has a serial number of "0", and thereafter, the serial numbers of the calls that occur sequentially at the same time point and at the same time point are sequentially increased. After the serial number is generated in step 1 302, the exchange proceeds to step 1 3 04. In step 1 04, the ongoing switch generates a call record for the call 202, which includes the newly generated NCID of the call 202. After the call log is generated, the ongoing switch leaves step 1114, and then executes step 1136 of Figure Π, where the ongoing switch writes the call log into the regional switch database. FIG. 13B shows the control logic of step 1115 of adding the received NCID to the call log of call 202. As soon as step 1115 is entered, the switch proceeds to step 13 06 in progress. When in step 1 06, the switch in progress knows that it received a valid NCID from the intermediate or terminal switch, or from the customer's switch. In step 1 06, the switch in progress determines whether the authorization code block of the 32-character call record can be used to store the NCID. If the authorization field is available, the exchange is in progress, then go to step 13 10. In step 13 10, the exchange stores the NCID in the authorization code field of the 32-character call record. During the process, the switch must also set the NCID position field to "1", which indicates that the NCID is stored in the authorization code block. After step 13 10, the exchange is in progress 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 85 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public) ---- I-I --- II < Please Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ------- frontline j Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of Invention (%) The device leaves step 1 1 15 and continues Go to step 1 136 in Figure 11, where the ongoing switch writes the call log to the regional switch database. Please refer to step 1 306 again. If the authorization code block cannot be expressed in 32-character call log format, the switch in progress then proceeds to step 1 3 08. In step 1 08, the ongoing exchange stores the NCID in the NCID field in the 64-character call log. After step 1308, the ongoing switch leaves step 1115, and then proceeds to step 1136 of FIG. 11, where the ongoing switch writes the call log into the regional switch database. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

FIG. 14 illustrates the control logic of step 1120 of transmitting a call from the switch in progress. The control logic has two entry points in steps 1402 and 1412. After going from step 1136 in FIG. 11 to step 14 02, the switch in progress knows that it has generated an NCID or has received a valid NCID. In step 1 402, the ongoing switch accesses the area database and obtains the trunk group parameters related to the terminal trunk group when transmitting the call 202. After obtaining these parameters, the exchange proceeds to step 1404. In step 1404, the ongoing switch determines the terminal trunk group type. If the terminal backbone is the ISUP backbone, the ongoing switch then executes steps 1 40 8. In step 1 408, the switch analyzes parameters related to the ISUP trunk form in progress to determine whether to transfer the NCID to the next switch. If the ongoing switch is authorized to transmit the NCID, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1416. In step 1416, the ongoing switch transmits the call and the SS7 initial address message (IAM) to the next switch. NCID uses IAM 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 86 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. General digits parameter Part of it. I AM contains setting information for the next switch, which is used to prepare the next switch to receive and complete the call 202. The general digit parameter format is as shown in the following table. General number of parameters: Code: 1 1 000001 Type: 〇 Printing of byte #, bit # for employee cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, which indicates byte 1, bit '0-4. content. This field has a double digit "11011" to indicate that this parameter contains the NCID. Byte 1, Bits 5-7 Coding method: indicates the format of the parameter content. This field has a binary number "011" to indicate that the NCID is stored in binary format. Byte 2, Bit 0-7 Byte 3, Bit 0-5 Start switch ID Byte 3, Bit 6-7 Byte 4, Bit 0-7 Byte 5, Bits 0-3 Start stem group Bytes 5, Bits 4-7 Bytes 6, Bits 0-7 Bytes 7, Bits 0-6 Bytes Start Ports Bytes 7, Bits 7 Unused Byte 8, Bit 0-7 Byte 9, Bit 0-7 Byte 1 〇, Bit 0-7. Byte 11, Bit 0-7 Time point 1 bit Tuple 12, bit 0-2 NCID serial number, byte 12, 7-7 unused 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 87 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Installation --- II --- Ordering ---------- Line '' 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (e?) After 02 and I AM, the switch in progress then proceeds to step 1418 to leave the switch program. Please refer to step 1 408 again. If the switch in progress is not authorized to transmit the NCID to the next switch in the I AM message, the switch in progress proceeds to step 14 12. In step 14-12, the ongoing switch transmits the call 202 to the next switch under normal procedures, which includes transmitting an IAM message to the next switch if the NCID is not recorded as part of the general digit parameter. After transmitting the call 202, the switch proceeds to step 1418 to leave the switch program. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page): Line · Please refer to step 1404 again. If the switch in progress determines that the terminal trunk is not ISUP, the switch in progress will continue to process Step 1406. In step 1406, the switch in progress determines whether the terminal trunk group is an ISDN trunk (a terminal trunk group dedicated to a network customer). If the terminal backbone group is ISDN, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1410. In step 1410, the switch analyzes various parameters related to the form of the ISDN backbone group in order to determine whether to transmit the NCID to the next switch. If the active switch is authorized to transmit the NCID, the active switch proceeds to step 1414. At step 1414, the ongoing switch forwards the call and setup message to the next switch. The setting message contains the setting information for the next switch, which is used to prepare the next switch to receive and complete the call 202. The NCID is transmitted as part of the locking shift codeset 6 parameter of the setting information. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 88 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (sent by ρρ. The format of the parameters of the lock shift coding group 6 is shown in Table 3 07 below. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Lock shift coding Group 6 parameters: Code: 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Format: 0 byte #, bit # Description byte 1, bits 0-4 Digit format: indicates the parameter content. This field has "1 10 1 1 ”binary digit 値 to indicate that the parameter contains NCID. Byte 1, Bit. 5-7 Coding method: indicates the format of the parameter content. This field has“ 011 ”binary digit 値, NCID is stored in binary format. Byte 2, Byte. 0-7 Byte 3, Byte 0-5 Start switch ID Byte 3, Byte 6-7 Byte 4, Bit 0-7 Bit 5, Bit 0-3 Start stem group Bit 5, Bit 4-7 Bit 6, Bit 0-7 Bit 7, Bit 0-6 Start port number Byte 7, Bit 7 Unused Byte 8, Bit 0-7 Byte 9, Bit 0-7 Byte 10, Bit 0-7 Byte Group 11 1, bits 0-7, time point 1 byte 1, 2, bits 0-2 NCID serial number, byte 1, 2, bits 3-7 unused After sending the call 02 and the setting message, the switch in progress then proceeds to step 1418 to leave the switch program. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 89 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 (Mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. Invention Description ($) Please refer to step 1410 again. If the switch in progress determines that it does not have the right to send the NCID to the next switch, the switch in progress Then step 1412 is performed. In step 1412, the switch in progress transmits the call 202 to the next switch under the normal procedure, which includes the case where the NCID is not recorded as part of the parameter of the lock shift code group 6 Send the setup message to the next switch. In Send Call 2 After 02, the current switch then proceeds to step 1418 to leave the switch program. Please refer to step 1412 again. When the switch does not receive an NCID, is an intermediate or terminal switch, and is not authorized to generate an NCID, Step 1118 of FIG. 11 enters this step. In this case, the switch in progress in step 1412 also transmits the call 202 to the next switch under normal procedures, which includes transmitting an I AM or setting message to the next switch if the NCID is not recorded as part of the parameter. An exchanger. After transmitting the call 202, the ongoing switch proceeds to step 1418 to leave the switch program. A system and method that enables a switch of a telex communication network to use a flexible and extensible record format to generate a call record of a telephone call. After receiving a phone call, the switch in the network analyzes the phone call to determine whether the preset call log is large enough to record call log information about the phone call, or whether it is necessary to use the extended call log to record and store information about Call information for this phone call. After deciding which call log to use, the switch generates a preset or extended call log. After completing the entire billing block, the switch transmits the billing block including all call records to the billing center. Brief introduction of the reply telephone system according to the preferred embodiment 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 90 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ installation --- I ---- Order ------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Line A7 1226164 __ B7__ V. Description of the invention ((| 1) The current telephone environment, callers The switchboard must be contacted to initiate a conference call, and / or all participants must dial a common number to connect to a conference call. This requires the cost of a human switchboard and the inconvenience of dialing a predetermined number to initiate each conference call. Scheduling It becomes inefficient to make a conference call and it must be confirmed that each participant must be available. It also requires a dedicated line number to make it easier for all participants to use the call. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the reply system enables dialing The user can easily use the options on the display from the computer and finish the information describing the parameters of the call. The information that can be captured is the date and time when the call should start, billing information, and the phone numbers of the parties involved in the call Then, based on the information entered, a central or decentralized computing device with access to the merged network can send an email notification to each participant in need to confirm their participation and note the date of the meeting. The email can include any Special items, such as the password associated with the call and the time when the call started. Necessary network facilities will also be reserved to ensure that a good quality of service (QOS) can be obtained, and when the required date and time arrive At that time, the conference call will be initiated by contacting each participant, regardless of whether it is using a phone connected to the PSTN or a voice device (such as a computer or smart TV) connected to a network. When scheduling, At any time during the start and call, any participant can request the assistance of the switchboard by selecting a service from the display options associated with the call. Therefore, call setup and control can provide a fully automated response system. For the normal basis Callers who use the reply system, the custom profile (custom profile) will also be used Stretch. Custom

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW ___ Use Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- 1 ---- I ---- Order ------- -. (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Intellectual Property Bureau 91 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 ___B7__ V. Invention description data allows users to store frequently Information about participants in the conference. This information includes the participant's phone number (which can be DDD, IDDD, IP address or mobile phone number, etc.), email address, call service, fax number, secretary phone number, location, time zone, working hours and others Useful information for starting this call. Preset data based on company or organization needs can also be activated, and can be modified based on more comprehensive information to meet specific user needs. Billing information is also available online. The user can enter a pre-arranged account number or the ability to pay by credit card or phone number. If the phone number is billed, the system will consider the call as a pay phone or a third-party phone and confirm the bill. If the default data message for a specific call, another option will allow a conference call or a single call to be connected immediately when the button is pressed. In addition to the feature that more than one caller can join without disturbing the call, It is roughly like speed dialing today, and also supports Internet callers and joins the switchboard when needed. Before describing the features of this aspect of the invention, some Internet environments are described. The Internet The Internet is a method of interconnecting physical networks and a set of protocol conventions that allow the computers connected to it to interact. In fact, according to the Government Total, the Internet is a large, global network that covers 92 countries and includes 5 9,000 academic, commercial, government, and military networks, and these numbers are multiplying each year. In addition, there are about 10 million 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 92 paper sizes applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) i I ----- ^ ---- ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (? 3) Mainframe computer, 50 million users and 76 10,000 World-Wide Web servers are connected to the Internet. The Internet backbone includes a series of high-speed communication links ’between major supercomputer stations and educational and research institutions in the United States and around the world. Protocols govern behavior on the backbone of the Internet and set the main rules for data communications. Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol

Protocol (TCP / IP) has an open nature and can be used by everyone, which means that it tries to create a network protocol system independent of computer or network operating system and architecture differences. In this way, the public can obtain the TCP / IP agreement with standard documents, especially RFCs (Requests for Comments). The Internet connection requirement is TCP / IP, which includes a large number of data communication protocols, two of which are Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and Internet Protocol (IP). The International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) has established several standards to dominate the linear coding of protocols and telecom communication equipment. Because many of these standards can refer to this document, only a few abstracts of relevant standards are listed here for reference. ITU G.7 11 is recommended for pulse code modulation of 3kHz audio channels. ITU G.72 2 is recommended for 7 kHz audio coding in 64kbit / s channels. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 93 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Packing -------- Order --------- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention ITU G.728 is recommended for speech coding using 16kbit / s low-delay coding to excite linear prediction (1 0w-de 1 ayc 0dee X cited 1 inear prediction, LD-CELP). ITU Η.221 1 in speech The frame structure of the visual telex communication service from 64 to 1920kbit / s. ITU H.223 low-bit-rate multimedia terminal multiplexing protocol. ITU H.225 ITU recommends as the media information stream encapsulation and non-guaranteed LAN service quality. Synchronization .. ITU H.230 Voice and Vision System Frame-Synchronous Control and Indication Signal. ITU H.231 Multipoint Control Unit for Voice and Vision System Using si 2Mbit / s Digital Channel. (Used by ITU H.242 2Mbit / s digital channel in voice and visual terminal System for establishing communication. ITU H.243 is a system for establishing communication between two or more voice and visual terminals using 2Mbit / s digital channels. ITU H.245 is recommended as a control protocol for multimedia communication. ITU H .261 is recommended as a video encoder-decoder for voice and visual services supporting video resolutions of 3 52488 pixels and 1 76344 pixels. ITU Η .263 is recommended as support for 1 2 8296 pixels, 1 763 44 pixels, 352488 dots, 7042576 dots and 1 4 083 1 52 dots. Video resolution video-encoder-decoder for voice and visual services. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 94 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install -------- order i ^ ------ 着 — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of invention ITU Η 3 20 is recommended as a narrow-band ISDN visual telephone system. ITU H. 32 1 Visual telephone terminal via ATM. ITU H.322 Through a visual telephone terminal that guarantees LAN service quality. ITU H.3 23 ITU recommends videophone systems and equipment that provide non-guaranteed quality of service for local area networks. ITU H.324 is recommended as a terminal and system for low bit rate (28.8Kbps) multimedia communications on dial-up telephone lines. ITU T.120 multimedia data transmission agreement. In addition, there are several other related standards, including: ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network, which is a digital communication standard for voice, video, and data over a single communication link. RTP Real-Time Transport Protocol, an Internet standard protocol for transmitting instant data such as voice and video over unicast and multicast networks. IP Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol), an Internet standard protocol for the transmission and transmission of data packets on a packet-switched network of interconnected computer systems. PPP Point-to-Point Protocol. MPEG Motion Pictures Expert Group, a standard body under the International Standards Organization, is recommended for compression of digital video and audio, including bit stream, but does not include compression algorithms law. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 95 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling this page)-丨 ··% · 1226164 A7 B7 Economy Printed by the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description Hb) SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol 〇 RSVP Resource Reservation Setup Protocol 0 UDP User Datagram Prot () e () 1). The popularity of TCP / IP protocols on the Internet is growing rapidly because they meet the important requirements of worldwide data communications, and there are many important features that allow them to meet this need. These features that are still in use today include: (1) A universal addressing method that allows any device running TCP / IP to uniquely address any other device on the Internet. (2) Open agreement standards are freely available and developed independently of any hardware or operating system. Therefore, even if Internet communication is not required, TCP / IP can be used by different hardware and software. Independent of any specific physical network hardware, TCP / IP can integrate many different types of networks. TCP / IP can be used on Ethernet, totem rings, dial-up wiring, or virtually any other physical transmission medium. Understanding how information is disseminated on communication systems is helpful in understanding the efforts of major performers in today's Internet backbone enterprises. The traditional form of communication network is circuit switched. The US telephone system uses this circuit switching technology. When a person or computer makes a call, the switching device in the telephone system looks for a physical path from the originating telephone to the receiving telephone. Circuit Switched Network

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the phonetic notes on the back and fill in this page first) -Packing ·.% · 1226164 A7 B7 Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau V. Invention Description (s) Road attempts to form an exclusive connection or circuit between the two points, from the initial telephone through the local exchange, and then across the trunk to the remote exchange 'Finally, a circuit is established by connecting to the destination phone. This dedicated connection will be connected until the call is terminated. The establishment of a complete path is necessary for data transmission in a circuit-switched network. After the circuit is ready, the microphone captures the analog signal ’and the signal is transmitted to the Local Exchange Carrier Central Office (LEC CO) through an analog circuit in an analog type. The analog signal was not converted to a digital version before it reached the LEC CO, and the digital version is only supported if the equipment is modern enough. However, in an ISDN embodiment, the analog signal is converted to a digital signal at the device and transmitted to the LEC as digital information. During the connection, by maintaining a 64Kbps (kilobits per second) data path 'circuit ensures that samples can be transmitted and reproduced. This rate is not the rate per second that digital speech is transmitted. 64Kbps is the rate required to transmit voice data digitalized using Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) technology. Many methods exist for digitizing voice signals, including ADPCM (32Kbps), GSM (13Kbps), TrueSpeech 8.5 (8.5Kbps), G.723 (6.4Kbps or 5.3Kbps), and Voxware RT29HQ (2.9Kbps). Furthermore, 64Kbps The path is maintained from the LEC CO switch to the LEC CO, not end-to-end. Analog local loops transmit analog signals instead of 64Kbps digitized audio. One of them is analogous to the local circuit-as

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). ------------ Install --- (Please read the phonetic note on the back first Matters written on this page) ··· 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (Μ) The "last mile" of the telephone network circuit is used to connect to the caller's local telephone. The guarantee of capacity is the power of the circuit-switched network. However, circuit switching has two serious disadvantages. First, the set-up time is quite considerable, because the call signal may find that the line is busy due to other calls; in this case, there is no way to get the connection except for some other connections to terminate the connection. Second, the utilization rate is low and the cost is high. In other words, the caller will be charged during the call, and all connection time will be charged even if there is no data transmission (that is, no one is talking). Because the connection is dedicated, the time between signal transmissions cannot be used by others, resulting in low usage. Any unused bandwidth during the connection is wasted. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, the entire circuit-switched infrastructure is built around 64Kbps circuits. The infrastructure assumes that speech is using PCM coding technology. However, there are very high quality decoders available, which can use less than one-tenth of the PCM bandwidth for speech encoding. However, a circuit-switched network specifically allocates a bandwidth of 64 Kbps for an end-to-end call, even if only one-tenth of the bandwidth is used. Furthermore, each circuit usually connects only two talkers. Without the assistance of a conference bridging device, the entire circuit of a phone call is occupied for one party to the other. Except for use with conference bridging equipment, circuit switching does not have the capability of multicast or multipoint communication. Other factors for long call set-up time include different signaling networks in the call set, and offset distances that cause propagation delays. Analog transmission from an endpoint to C0 on a low-bandwidth connection will also delay communication.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention ((η) Set the time. In addition, the call setting data is not always The transmission network that transmits data at the speed of light travels a long distance. When the call is an international call, the variation in the transmission network increases. The device's processing time for the call is usually not like a modem. The set-up time is generally fast, and the distance becomes longer, which makes the call set-up time slower. Moreover, generally speaking, 'because the two parties of the call need end-to-end signal handshaking, connection-oriented Virtual or physical circuit settings, such as circuit switching, require more time in connection setting time than comparable non-connected technologies. Message exchange is another considered exchange strategy. With this type of exchange, Instead, a physical path is not established in advance between the caller and the callee. Instead, as long as the caller has a block of data to send, it is stored in the working place of the first switch. And after the error check, it is retransmitted to the next exchange. The message exchange does not limit the size of the data block, so the exchange station must have a disk device to buffer the long data block. At the same time, a single data block can occupy Many minutes on one line make the exchange of interactive traffic information useless. The packet exchange network, which has occupied most of the computer network industry in advance, divides data into small units called packets, which are multiplexed between high-capacity machines. A packet is a block of data that has a strict upper limit on the block size. It contains enough identifying information needed to be transmitted to its destination. Such packets usually contain hundreds of bytes of data and only occupy a certain amount of data. A given transmission line takes tens of milliseconds. Large file transfer via packet exchange requires the file to be divided into many small packets and transmitted from one machine at a time to the other 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 99 This paper standard applies to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back and fill out this page first) Binding: Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Production Bureau 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 Β7 V. Invention Description (θϋ) Machine. The network hardware passes these packets to a specific destination, and the software will The packet is reconstituted into the original file. The packet exchange is used by virtually all computers interconnected because it is very efficient in data transmission. The packet switching network uses the bandwidth required by the circuit to allow other transmissions to pass through the transitional transmission line. Or, as long as other packets of the file arrive, the router or exchange can quickly forward any packet or part of a large file it receives to the next station, so the throughput is greatly increased. . In message exchange, the intermediate router must wait until the entire block is delivered before forwarding. Today, because of the superiority of packet exchange, message exchange is no longer used in computer networks. To better understand the Internet, it is helpful to compare the Internet with the telephone system. Public switched telephone networks are designed in a more or less identifiable form with the goal of transmitting human voice. Their applicability has been improved for computer-to-computer communication, but the optimization is still far from perfect. A cable connecting two computers can transfer data at hundreds of millions of bits per second, or even billions of bits per second. The low turnover rate at these speeds will result in only one turnover per day. In contrast, dial-up wiring systems using standard telephone lines have the highest data transfer rate of thousands of bits per second and a high error rate. In fact, the combined bit rate multiplied by the local cable's error rate performance can be more than 11 orders of magnitude higher than a voice-grade telephone line. However, new technologies have improved the performance of these telephone lines. The Internet includes a large number of individual networks that together form a global connection to thousands of computer systems. Understand that individual machines are connected to individual networks 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 100. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- -AW ^ — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order --------- Ceremony-1226164 A7 B7 Consumption Cooperation between Employees and Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 钍 Print 5. Description of Invention (\ 〇 |), You can see how the networks are connected together to form the Internet. Internet gateways and routers play this role. In terms of architecture, the two networks can be connected by a computer connected to the two networks. Internet gateways and routers provide the connections needed to send packets between networks and make the connection feasible. Without these connections, data communication over the Internet will become impossible, and information will neither reach the destination nor be understood after it arrives. The gateway can be imagined as the entrance of a communication network, which performs encoding and protocol conversion between two incompatible networks. For example, a gateway sends e-mail and data files across the Internet through the Internet. An IP router can also be a computer connected to the network, and is a new word that vendors like to use. These routers must use a constantly updated routing table to decide how to send the data packets he receives to his destination. The router makes these decisions by analyzing the destination network address of the packet. More importantly, routers generally do not need to decide which host computer or end user will receive the packet; instead, the router only searches the destination network and continuously tracks information that is sufficient to reach the correct network ', not necessarily The right end user. As a result, routers do not require very large supercomputer systems, and are often just machines with small main memory and a little disk storage. The difference between a gateway and a router is usually very small, and the current usage blurs the boundary of the two, causing the two terms to be used frequently. In the current terminology, a gateway transfers data between different protocols, and a router transfers data between two different networks. Therefore, transmission between TCP / IP and OSI

4HICICMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 male f) ▼ Installation -------- Order --------- line (Fill in this page again) 鬌 101 A7

1226164 V. Description of the Invention (丨 〇χ) The system for sending mail is a gateway, but the traditional IP gateway (connected to different networks) is a router. It is now useful to look at the routing of traditional telephone systems from a simplified point of view. The telephone system is organized as a highly redundant, multi-tiered architecture. Each phone has two copper wires pulled from the phone and is directly connected to the nearest terminal workstation of the company, also known as a local central work station. This distance is generally less than 10 km; in the United States, there are approximately 20,000 terminal workstations. The connection of the area code to the first three digits of the phone number uniquely identifies a specific terminal station and helps to control the rate and accounting structure. The two-wire connection between each subscriber phone and the endpoint workstation is called a local loop. If a user connected to a given terminal station dials another user connected to the same terminal station, the switching mechanism in the station establishes a direct electrical connection between the two local loops. During the call, the connection will remain intact because of the circuit-switching technology discussed later. If a user connected to a given terminal station dials another user connected to a different terminal station, the call routing work must be done more. First, each terminal workstation has several external telephone lines that are connected to one or more nearby switch centers, called toll offices. These lines are called toll connecting trunks. If the end station of the caller and the receiver happens to have a long-distance connection backbone connected to the same long-distance workstation, a connection can be established in this long-distance workstation. If the caller and receiver are not 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 102 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- ------ Order --------- line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives printed A7 1226164 _B7___ V. Description of the invention (丨 θ) If the same long-distance workstation is shared, the path must be established somewhere in the higher hierarchy. There are many regional and regional workstations forming a network so that all long-distance workstations can be connected. Long-distance, regional, and regional exchanges communicate through high-bandwidth inter-toll trunks. The number of different types of switching centers and their specific topologies vary from country to country, depending on their telephone distribution density. Using Network Level Communication to Stabilize User Connections In addition to the Internet's data transfer capabilities, TCP / IP also attempts to convince users that the Internet is a separate and virtual network. TCP / IP accomplishes this goal by providing a universal interconnection between machines, which has nothing to do with the specific network to which the host and end user are connected. In addition to the interconnection of routers on the physical network, software is also required on each host to allow applications to use the Internet as if it were a single real physical network. The basis of Internet services is a hidden unconnected packet delivery system implemented by routers, and its basic unit of transmission is packets. In the Internet running TCP / IP, such as the backbone of the Internet, these packets are called packets. This section briefly discusses how these packets are routed across the Internet. In a packet switching system, routing is the process of selecting a path through which packets can be transmitted. As mentioned earlier, the router is the computer that makes these choices. When routing information from a host on one network to another host on the same network, the packet does not actually reach the backbone of the Internet. This is an example of internal routing, which is completely self-contained 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 103 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Packing ----- --- Order --------- line 01 ^-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumption, Printed by Hezhu Society Cooperative printed 1226164 A7 ^ ~ -____ B7____ 5. Description of the invention ((called 0 in this network. Machines outside the network do not participate in these internal routing decisions. At this stage, direct and indirect delivery must be distinguished.) . Direct transfer is the transmission of data packets across a single physical network from one machine to another in the same physical network. This type of transfer does not need to go through a router, but the sender encapsulates the data in a physical frame. Address it, and then send this frame directly to the destination machine. When more than one physical network is involved, it needs to be passed indirectly, especially when one machine on the network wants to communicate with another machine on the network Time. The type of communication can be thought of as the situation of routing information through the backbone of the Internet. In indirect delivery, a router is needed. To send a packet, the sender must confirm the router that can send the packet, and the router then sends the packet Forward to the destination network. Routers generally do not track the addresses of individual hosts (which have millions of addresses), they only track the physical network (only thousands). Basically, on the Internet The routers form a cooperative operation and interconnected structure. Data packets cross the backbone from one router to another router until they reach a router that can directly transfer data packets. The change in the Internet world has led to new systems and technologies. Stable introduction. The following three developments are taken as an introduction to this technology area, and each technology may become very popular in the near future. For the local area network and wide area network, Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) ) Is a high-speed, 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND 1 PI22 TW 104 paper size suitable for China Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- Installation -------- Order · -------- (Please read the note on the back first ? Please fill out this page again) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description ((. 5) Network technology of the connection-oriented system βΑΤΜ _ Road needs to include the following modern hardware facilities Η high-speed switch, which can pick up a few seconds to know (t full. Η ⑹ Buddha speed operation, to deal with flow problems in many computers. 2) Optical fiber (for copper wire), which provides high data transmission to the i55Mbps (per division) per-wire A-switch connection. 3) Cells of fixed size, each consisting of 53 bytes. ATM combines the 7 features of the Longyan Face Residency, which is designed to carry voice and TV signals in addition to data. The pure packet recording system is more reliable, and the stitching needs more stable bandwidth. In the frame, __packet transfer is used to make New Zealand's traditional system more efficient. This efficiency is partly due to the fact that they perform fewer error checks than traditional x25 packet handoffs. In fact, multiple intermediate nodes only do a little or no error checking, and only do it, and the error checking is left to the higher layers of the system to handle. With high reliability of transmission today, it becomes unnecessary to perform many error checks in advance. As a result, frame relays provide better performance than traditional systems.

Integrated Services Digital Network is an international telex communication standard for transmitting voice, video, and data through digital lines. Most of them operate at a speed of 64Kbps. Traditional telephone networks only operate at 4Kbps. To adopt ISDN, endpoint users or companies must update to ISDN

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 105 ----------- installation -------- order-- ------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 ^ ~ -------- B7_ V. Description of the invention (\ 〇G) Terminal equipment, central working hardware And software etc. The surface goals of ISDN include the following: 1) Provide internationally acceptable standards for voice, data, and messaging (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 2) Make all transmission circuits end-to-end digital 3) using out-of-band signaling systems; and 4) bringing greater bandwidth to desktop computers. ISPs include several different systems. When ISPs are integrated, with the increase in analysis, testing, scheduling, and training levels across all ISP specifications, the previous stand-alone system is now part of the overall system. Internet-type response architecture The following information is a detailed architecture description of an Internet-type response architecture discussed in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the present invention. When the caller dials into the local internet service provider, it starts to reply to the call flow. The connected person will reply to the server address to access the callback home page via the Internet. On the homepage of the reply server, the connected person enters, watches and / or updates the preset information, such as replying to the Internet Protocol address (IP) address, sending the telephony and intellectual property bureau employee consumption cooperation fi Printed phone numbers (or multiple phone numbers to initiate a conference call), and a minimal billing method. Other information, such as one or more numbers, including direct distance dialing (DDD), international direct distance dialing (IDDD), or Internet Protocol (IP) address Can be used to specify a phone number or the Internet with voice capabilities 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 106 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 Intellectual Property咼 员 ^^ ί £ ·: ρ ^ 1226164 Description of invention (W)) Road computer. In addition, the date and time can be pre-arranged to plan a response. According to the preferred embodiment of the present invention, the additional information that can be found on the home page of the reply server will be explained and illustrated in the following specific examples. Then the 'reply server sends a message to the reply switch with the appropriate call information, and the reply switch initiates the reply process of this call to the destination specified by the caller via the Public Service Telephony Network (PSTN). , Which is where the replyer responds to the incoming call. Once the caller's end of the call is ready, the switch responds to initiate a call history record, which connects the call to a telephone group via a path via the PSTN. Once all callers are connected, when the call status changes, the exception status will be displayed on the display if it is an IP call, or an audio indicator of the status will be passed to the caller if a standard telephone device is used. The change of state can be a small problem that occurs when the caller hangs up or messes up. Exceptions will also be captured for quality of service analysis. When the call is initiated using the information entered into the home page of the reply server, a separate temporary web page will be generated as part of the start of the reply chat, which can make all the members who reply reply through the password selected by the reply initiator access. When all callers are connected during a phone call, the call history change status and exception status are displayed on the temporarily generated status page, or if a standard phone device is used, the status's audio indicators are transmitted to the caller at the appropriate time. Then, as the talker connects, moves, or changes state, the display updates to reflect the connection status of each participant. In addition, during the call, participants can get and throw

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW -------- 1 --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 107 ^ The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 When Qilang Wisdom ¾ ¾ members x-Xiao Fei ^ 咋 Comparison A7 B7 _ V. The invention description ((0¾) file, video attachment or other information as a collaborative processing material Before the call ends, each participant needs to move the data to his own personal computer, because the web page is temporary and will be deleted as soon as the call ends. The temporary web page is protected by a password to prevent the Unauthorized access to the information in the reply service. Reply service potential reply service includes support for one-to-one call, one-to-many call (conference call), fax broadcast, text-to-speech messaging, voice-to-speech messaging, conference call hold , The server sends the E-mail to send the details of the conference call to the calling participant, sends a fax to the calling participant, or sends a text-to-speech message to the calling participant by the method described above. When participants are connected to the conference, the instant status of each conference call participant is viewed, and the ANI and alphanumeric representation entered by the initiator to confirm each participant will be displayed on the display when the call is held This information can be retrieved as part of the call history previously proposed. In another embodiment, a conference call without a reply history can be initiated. In this embodiment, the reply call customer uses voice capabilities The computer participates through the Voice Over Network (VON) application, and the video screen burst can be activated on the computer monitor as a manual operation assistance for the video operation as detailed above. Internet-style response architecture In the Internet-based reply architecture, the caller of the reply dials the local Internet service provider. Then, the caller connects to the home page that contains the reply 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 108 This paper standard applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this Page) 1 226164 A7 B7 5. The host server of the invention description (丨 call). On the home page of the reply server, the caller enters various information previously described, including replying to the Internet Protocol (IP) address, the calling phone number (or Multiple phone numbers to initiate a conference call) and the lowest billing method, etc. Then, the reply server on the homepage of the reply call to the reply call process sends a message with the necessary call information generated by the reply homepage. Message to reply exchange. Finally, the "reply switch establishes an Internet voice chat with the reply speaker", which uses an Internet service provider to establish a voice 1P conversation with the initial client. The reply switch then generates an outgoing call history, which routes the call to a telephone group via the public service telephone network. Self-Regulating System

The expert system monitors each call according to the preferred embodiment. The system includes rules that define what logic to execute when an exception occurs. Rules include specific handlers based on whether calls are routed via the PSTN or the Internet. In addition, when no other modified connection is available, the system includes a preset connection to a manual switchboard. For example, if a caller hangs up during a conference call while other callers are still online, an external message is sent to each other caller who is still connected to notify them of a change in status. Another purpose of the expert system is to ensure quality of service (QOS) and generate reports showing completeness and exceptions. Resource scheduling contacts this expert system, which regulates whether calls can be scheduled based on the resources available or planned at the time of the scheduled call. For example, because all calls used by this system are initiated by the reply switch, if there is not enough external trunk port during the period requested by the reply user, the reply user will be suggested 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read the back first Note: Please fill out this page again) 1226164 Printed clothing A7 B7___ by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (U〇) Choose another time, or access to resources will be denied during that time. This is used to estimate when additional ports and / or resources will be required. Fault Management The NGN operating architecture specifies insertion and collection points for cross-network events of the input error error management system. In most cases, because the components of the packet portion of a coupled NGN infrastructure are easily managed by SnMP or some other standard management protocol, the main challenges are as follows: 1. Events from the packet infrastructure and the core circuit-based network Correlation of events' is used to provide a seamless service of the switchboard, which examines the health of the overall network. 2. Collection and interpretation of events from core circuit network components; and 3. Arbitration and standardization of network information to assist NGN's network management architecture process. NGN network management components provide easy-to-understand methods to handle These challenges. Relevance is provided by usage rules according to the interface engine. Event collection and interpretation are generally performed by custom-developed software interfaces, which communicate directly with network components, process new events, and prioritize content before storage. For example, a warning is a command response. The challenge of coordination and standardization is addressed by using an easy-to-understand database of all possible message types and network events that classify the myriad of messages generated by NGN. Fig. 15A is a flowchart of the error management program 1550 according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention. The error management procedure 1 5 50 starts with a transmission step 1 5 52. At step 1 52, the data is transmitted over a converged network, which includes video and mixed audio information. Data transmission is generally completely 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 110 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install ------ --Order ------- 1 (Please read the back, please pay attention to the matter before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 B7 _ V. Description of the invention (丨 u) Exchange with hybrid circuit A combination of network and packet exchange components. As mentioned above, a composite network includes all the advantages of a packet network, but still uses older circuit-switching components that already exist. By correlating events caused by circuit-switched and packet-switched network elements, the system can accomplish the above purpose, which is related to events and the correlation steps 1554, 1556 as described below. In the circuit-switched event collection step 1554, an event is obtained from the circuit-switched network element. As discussed above, event collection and interpretation are typically performed by custom-developed software interfaces that communicate directly with network components, process new network events, and prioritize them based on content before storage. After obtaining the event, correlate the obtained event in step 1 56. In the correlation step 1 5 5 6, the event obtained in step 1 54 is correlated with both the second event obtained from a packet-switched network element. Together with circuit-switched network elements, the collection and interpretation of packet-switched events is typically performed by custom-developed software interfaces that communicate directly with network elements, process new network events, and prioritize them based on content before storage. As discussed above, this association is preferably provided by a rule-based interface engine. After the event is associated, an error message is generated in steps 1 5 5 8. In step 1 5 5 8 of the error message, an error message is generated based on the relevant first and second events obtained in steps 1 5 54 and 1 5 5 6. Preferably, error messages are generated using an easy-to-understand database of all possible message types and network events that classify the myriad of messages generated by the combined network. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 111 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order-- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 _______— B7___ V. Description of the Invention (\ H) Figure 15B is based on the present invention A block diagram of the error management component 15 00 drawn by the preferred embodiment. Error management component 1 500 records errors and exceptions of network devices (such as network routers or UNIX servers) and performs the following actions: 1) Performs the root cause of the error and the exception; 2) Takes corrective and / or notification actions immediately , Such as sending calls, login assistance, sending email messages, or call decomposition scripts; '3) store information in the database component so that the report component can be analyzed later; and 4) allow real-time viewing errors from the perspective of network maps and network events . The fault management component 1 500 includes the following elements: UNIX server 1502: any UNIX server with client-loaded BMC Patrol NT server 1504: any NT server with client-loaded BMC Patrol

SNMP device 1 506: Any SNMP manageable device HP OV network node manager f collector component) 1 5 08: HP

OpenView Network Node Manager is a product that performs several functions. In this article, it is responsible for receiving performance information from BMC Patrol customers via BMC Patrol View.

Seagate NerveCenter 15 10: In the context of error management, Seagate NerveCenter performs correction of the root cause of errors and incidents across the network.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order --- ------ (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 ^ ------ B7_ i. Description of the invention (U3) Page) HP OV Network Node Management Network Map 1512: HP OpenView Network Node Manager is a product that performs several functions. In this article, it is responsible for maintaining and displaying the node-level network map of the network and MNSIS architecture monitoring. HP 0V Network Node Manager 1514: HP OpenView Network Node Manager is a product that performs several functions. In this article, it is responsible for receiving and displaying all events, regardless of their source.

Netcool HP OV NNM Detector 1516: An Omnibus Netcool Detector, which is installed on the same system as the HP 0V Network Node Manager and forwards events to the Omnibus Netcool Object Server.

Micromuse Internet Service Monitoring 1518: An active probe (monitor) package from Omnibus Netcool, which monitors Internet traffic, FTP, POP3, SMTP, NNTP, DNS, HTTP, and RADIUS. These monitors collect accessibility and performance data ’and relay this information to the 0 m n i b u s N e t c ο ο 1 object server.

Netcool Object Server 1 520: Omnibus Netcool Object Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The server is a resident database of real-time memory that stores all customer events (alerts). Events can be viewed by operators using several event forms or viewpoints, and all events can be customized by each operator. Notification Spooler 1 522: Provides a custom secondary component that temporarily stores work files that specify what events have occurred for possible notifications.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (\ Call) 11 Deposit 1S24: Each inventory job represents a specific event, which is received by the Netcool object server, and may require one or more notification actions. Each job is stored as a file in a special notification inventory. Notify actors_1 5 2 6: —Customized sub-components that determine the alert time, source node, and alert type from loading and inventory tasks, and issue notifications as specified by the configuration file. Notification actions include alphanumeric paging, difficulty notifications, e-mail, and breakdown scripts. Multiple notification actions can be specified in the configuration file, allowing different actions to be taken for different alert times, source nodes, and / or alert types. Preset actions are also supported. Word. No Count. Word Paging 1 528: Alphanumeric paging is sent using Telamon TelAleirt to dial the relevant paging provider via modem. Alphanumeric paging messages provide a text notification of the action to be performed. The content can include any information, but usually includes information such as device name, problem description, and priority. Kasuga jyiu message 1 530: Internet mail messages are sent using the UNIX mail utility. Email messages are often used to provide non-emergency notifications of conditions or actions performed automatically by the MNSIS architecture and details. Zone leg. This implementation 1 5 32: Launch any zone script on the machine, which can launch scripts or applications on other machines. Repair gateway 1 5 3 4: Omnibus Netcool repair gateway automatically reads alarms in the Netcool object server, and the user's office 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 114 This paper standard applies to Chinese national standards (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 public love) installed -------- order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) [226164 A7 B7 Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau of the Consumer Cooperative Printed Clothes V. Invention Description (ιπ) A notice will be opened during a custom repair. The obstacle notification ID is sent back to Omnibus and can be used for further reference. Repair 1 5 3 6: Repair action request system, a difficult handling system. Oracle Gateway 1 5 3 8: Omnib us N et c ο ο 1 Or ac 1 e The gateway automatically reads alerts in the Netcool object server and records the records in a user-defined Oracle Oracle 1 5 40-Oracle is a relational database management system. Generate Time Critical Script 1 542: Script to generate new time record from alert in Netcool Object Server. New time record 1 544: The time record corresponding to the new alert in the Netcool object server, which needs to be added to Oracle's schedule. SQL Loader Script 1546:-A custom script that loads the autoloading records directly into Oracie via the SQL Loader. Proactive Threshold Manager A Proactive Threshold Manager is an automatic network manager that will alert for incidents of service provider service level agreements to maintain a particular service level at risk from being compromised. Full-time critical managers use algorithms to provide real-time critical analysis (ie, continuous monitoring of preset thresholds that have been performed). It receives a detailed record of M words from the server and returns a warning message that it can be obtained and inspected using an NGN workstation. Critical managers reside in NGN network computers. The critical threshold is usually a number. When this threshold is exceeded, a warning message is generated among the full-time critical managers' to indicate possible gaps in non-service level agreements. The critical threshold can be specified as the time of day or the number of days of the week. again

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW Install -------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 115 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System A7 B7 _ 5. In the invention description (\ \ b), critical thresholds can be applied to each category, so full-time critical managers can keep counts, including the number of short-term calls, the number of long-term calls, and accumulated minutes. Wait. When an alert is generated by a dedicated critical manager, it also has priority. The priority is a multiplier of the number of times the critical threshold is exceeded. For example, if the threshold is 10 and the associated count is 50, the priority of the alert is 5 (50 divided by 10). Each alert is sent to the NGN Hybrid Network Analyst via the NGN workstation. The workstation is a PC with an access server and retrieval of the next highest priority alert that can be obtained. The analyst investigates the alert data, and if there is a suspicion of a missing service level agreement, the service provider is notified and appropriate action is proposed to stop the lack of occurrence. FIG. 16A is a flowchart of a full-time critical management program 16 00 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The program starts with monitoring step 1602. In step 162, the full-time critical manager monitors the NGN coupling network. Generally speaking, a full-time critical manager monitors the network throughout the entire process and helps service providers maintain the appropriate service levels to ensure that appropriate services are provided to network users. At the lowest level judgment step 1 604, the full-time critical manager judges the required minimum service level to avoid breaking the user's service level agreement. With a rule database containing the most relevant user information, SLA information is provided to full-time critical managers. In a detection step 1606, the full-time critical manager detects the service level currently provided to the customer. Communicate with various system components 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 116 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install- ------ Order --------- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) A7 1226164 _B7_ 5. When the invention is explained (\ 〇), the agreement converter will assist the full-time critical Manager. The protocol converter is able to translate information between packet-switched and circuit-switched system architectures, thus allowing full-time critical managers to communicate with all coupled system components. In comparing step 1 608, the full-time critical manager compares the current service level sensed in step 16 06 with the minimum service level determined in step 1 604 to determine the current service level and the lowest service level provided to the user. Where is the relationship. In the warning step 1610, if the current service level falls within a predetermined range relative to the lowest service level, the full-time critical manager provides an instruction or a warning to the service provider. The critical threshold selected is, preferably, sufficient to allow the service provider to have sufficient time to resolve the service level problem before the minimum service level is reached and the user service level is destroyed. FIG. 16B is a flowchart of a network sensing program 1 620 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The network sensing procedure 1 620 starts with a component monitoring step 1 622. In step 1 622, the custom-developed component software monitors individual network components and generates events based on hardware conditions such as switch errors. In general, the various components that make up a coupled network differ greatly from each other. Therefore, in general, custom software is necessary for each network element or related group of network elements. Custom development software communicates directly with hardware and generates events when various conditions related to individual hardware occur. For example, when a hardware component fails, the associated component software senses the failure and generates an event that indicates the hardware failure and the general nature of the failure. Events are then routed to the component manager for processing. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 117 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- ^ -------- Order- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΗPrinted by the Consumer Cooperatives Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics ΗPrinted by the Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 _____B7_____ V. Invention Description (\ β ) In the event processing step 1624, the events generated in step 1622 will be filtered, aggregated and correlated by the component manager. The component manager is located where primary data reduction functions are located. Component managers filter, aggregate, and correlate events' to further isolate problems in the network. Any information deemed important to the monitoring and management network is translated into a standard object format in a translation step 1626. In the translation step 1626, information from step 1624 that is considered important to the monitoring and management network is translated into a standard object format. In general, general operating events are only recorded and not translated into standard object formats. However, important information such as hardware errors is translated and forwarded to the information service manager in the information provision step 1628. In feed step 1 628, from step! The information of 62 6 is received by the information service manager and forwarded to the full-time critical manager. The information service manager provides data management and data communication between the component manager and other system components. In general, information service managers follow the CORBA standard to provide extensive information access through object request brokers. Objects require agents to allow information service managers to share management information stored in a decentralized database. The full-time critical manager uses the information provided by the information service manager to determine the current service level, and compares the current service level with the lowest service level that the service provider can provide without violating the SLA.

Element Management 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese national standard 7cNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm ^ ----------- install ------ --Order --------- line (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) A7 1226164 B7__ V. Description of the Invention (U ^) As discussed above, the component manager and information service management Developers and expression managers work together to assist in the management of the integrated network system. These three components are briefly described below to provide content to the component managers that are described next. Component managers Component managers and network components Communication to receive alerts and alert via trapping and polling technology. The component manager is located at the layer where the main data reduction function is located. At this layer, events received by the component manager can be filtered , Aggregation and association to further isolate problems in the network. Information that is considered important for monitoring and managing the network will be translated into standard object formats and forwarded to information service managers. Components Managers can Non-essential is software, which follows open standards, such as the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) common objects of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and the Object Management Group (OMG) ) o Information service manager The information service manager provides data management and data communication between the component manager and the expression manager. All information forwarded from the component manager is used by the information service manager to provide information For network operators. Information service managers follow the CORBA standard to provide the ubiquitous 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 119 @Object Dimensions through the Object Request Broker (ORB). Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) — ------------ 41 ^ equipment -------- order --------- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before (Fill in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 1226164 B7____ V. Description of invention (P °) Information access. ORB allows information service managers to share and store information in decentralized Material library management information. Information services manager to store important information on operation management (real-time) and analysis (historical) distributed database. These databases provide a common data store so that new products can be easily inserted into the management environment. For example, if an event that is considered important and displayed to a network user is received at the component manager, the information service manager can store a copy of the alert in the operations database and forward the alert to Appropriate network operator. The media and text database are also provided by the information service manager. The database includes online manuals for business purposes and component-specific information for maintenance experts to access. The database also provides procedures, policies and computer-based training to network users. Information service managers provide requested information (real-time and historical) to network users via presentation managers. Presentation Manager (Presentation Manager) Representation managers perform functions that are implied by their name: Presentation information to endpoint users. Because different locations and work functions need to access different types of information, there are at least two forms of display. The first is a large number of graphical expressions, and the second is for random use purposes, such as local technicians. The first environment requires a large number of graphical displays, such as those provided by X-Windows / MOTIF. The second environment has no bandwidth potential. Dial-up or wireless access can be used in this area with more traditional LAN access. This is where browser technology is used ° 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 120 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install- ------- Order --------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 B7-i N Invention Description ( \: M) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) The component management perspective of the present invention works with other components of the system, such as error management, to provide communication between various network components of the system. Fig. 17 is a flowchart of a component management program 1700 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The component management program 1 700 starts with a monitoring step 1 702. At step 1 702, the component manager monitors events in the system generated by network components. In general, the component manager continuously monitors the system to translate events to other components, such as fault management components. In the event receiving step 1704, the component manager receives events from various network components. Preferably, events are provided by a custom software interface that communicates directly with network components. The software interface better handles new network events and prioritizes events based on content before providing events to component managers. Printed by members of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperation, and Society. In the filtering and association step 1706, the component manager filters and correlates the events received in step 1704. Preferably, the correlation is provided by a rules-based interface engine. After collecting and related events, the component manager performs a translation step 1708. At step 1708, the events associated with step 1706 are translated into a standard object format. In general, a simple library of all message types generated by a coupled network is used to translate associated events into standard object formats. Once events are translated, they can be used by other system components, such as fault management or accounting. Customer Support Structure 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 121 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The organizational model of customer service support in the NGN network provides a single point of contact, focusing on the customer. This single point of contact provides technical expertise to address customer emergencies, difficulties and requirements. Generally speaking, the level of support structure has greatly increased customer satisfaction in service requirements. Each level has an increased technical level, and work and responsibilities are allocated accordingly. Figure 18 A flowchart of the three-tier customer support program 1 800 is shown. The three-tier customer support process starts at 1800 and starts at step 1 802 on the first tier. At step 1 802, customers with mixed network issues are provided access to customer support staff with a variety of different technologies. These different technologies allow this group to solve approximately 60 ~ 70% of all hybrid networks. If the customer network problem is resolved at this stage, the process ends. However, if the customer network problem is not resolved at this stage, the program proceeds to the second layer step 1804. At step 1804 on the second level, customers are provided with access to technical experts and outfield support staff specializing in certain areas. The larger specialized nature of this group allows it to solve problems that the group in step 1 802 cannot solve. This group is generally responsible for 30 to 40% of all mixed network combined network problems. If the customer network problem is resolved at this stage, the process ends. However, if the customer network problem is not resolved at this stage, the program proceeds to the third layer step 1806. In the third layer step 1 806, a customer contact expert is provided, usually a hardware vendor, software vendor, or customer application development and maintenance team. Reaching the depth of customer network problems in the customer support program 1800 requires individual in-depth technical processing procedures to investigate and resolve each specialty 210 X 297 mm) ----------- Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (Θ3) Difficult issues in the industry. Problem-solving experts are the last resource for solving the most difficult problems. Generally this group solves about 5% of all combined networks. The above model is generally referred to as the technical model, because all personnel in the three levels are highly technical personnel. This model usually creates a high percentage of call resolutions on the first call. Other approaches include a functional model and an ignore model. In the functional model, users are required to access different areas based on the nature of the emergency. The call is routed to the customer support representative who can best handle the call. This model can be easily incorporated into the above technical model. In the first layer of the ignore model, only calls are recorded and not resolved. One advantage of this model is that technical resources do not waste time logging in to the call. In more detail, according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, a customer calling a customer support center will be first asked a series of questions from an interactive voice response system (IVR) or a human operator. The customer uses the touch-tone buttons on the phone to answer IVR questions, or to answer questions asked by a live operator normally. When product support engineers are available, the previously collected information (responses from IVR questions and diagnostic information from system problem handlers and component managers) is handed over to product support engineers. After reviewing the customer's condition, the product support engineer can ask the customer's computer for additional information if necessary. According to the system of the preferred embodiment of the present invention, the customer spends less time interacting with the product support engineer, and removes much of the responsibility for diagnosing and solving problems. Automatic diagnosis and interaction with shorter customers

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Packing --- I ---- Order --------- (Please read the back first (Notes? Matters should be filled out on this page) A7 B7 1226164 V. Inventory room, resources and money. At the same time, customers can accept better problem diagnosis and resolution than the conventional product support technology. In addition, the embodiment of the present invention makes the Internet another feasible method 'to make the phone a tool for providing customer product support. Many online computer services, such as Prodigy and America On-Line, provide software to connect and access the Internet and charge for it as part of their online services. The Internet access software accesses and talks with the Internet portal server, which verifies the PIN, provides access and calculates the user access time. The Internet portal server is programmed to recognize the PIN as a limited pre-paid or free Internet access time to the user to provide online assistance services. This interval can be full time, such as one hour or more, or 90 days ’6 months of unlimited online assistance services, such as the prepaid access time given by the sponsor / supplier. The first time a customer uses the online assistance service, the Internet portal server performs the registration process, which includes custom data collected from many personal questions answered by the user and questionnaires provided by the sponsor / supplier. Related questions are immediately provided to the sponsor / supplier. The Internet portal server then “hot-links” the customer to the sponsor ’s / supplier ’s Internet domain or homepage for a compulsory tour, where users can see the sponsor / supplier To any current product promotion activities, and can download promotional coupons, product information, etc. After the obligatory tour is completed, customers are allowed to enter to seek assistance in installing or using the sponsor / supplier's products. As an optional promotion service, at the end of online assistance, you can mention 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 124 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------- ---- Equipment -------- Order --------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by A7 B7____ printed by Hezhu Society of Intellectual Property Bureau staff. 5. Description of Invention (ας) Provides access to other information on the Internet. Once the free online assistance service time or time period ends, the Internet portal server prompts the user for one or more options to extend the availability of online assistance. For example, the user may be prompted to enter a credit card number so that online assistance can be charged for it; he or she may have the opportunity to answer additional survey information for additional free online assistance; or a prepaid fee for a phone number 900 user Phone access numbers can be provided, whereby additional online assistance can be billed through the normal telephone company's 900 telephone billing cycle. Integrating IP Phone User Interface Embodiments of the present invention allow users of web applications to communicate over bandwidth using audio without having to pick up another phone. The user can press the button to reach the call center via a hybrid network using an IP phone. The system will synchronize the IP phone conversation with the data conversation, and whenever someone uses the system, the system will use the active directory query. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an integrated IP telephone program 1 900 according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The IP telephony program 1900 starts with a transmission step 1902. In step 1 902, the data during the data conversation is transmitted over the combined network. This data conversation is usually a normal Internet browsing conversation and is usually initiated by a web browser. With a web browser ', the user starts a data conversation by performing a search on the website or downloading data from an Internet website. During a data conversation ’the invention allows the user to choose to initiate a telephone call without having to use another telephone

At telephone step 1904, the present invention allows the user to initiate and continue telephone communication. When the user selects a phone number to dial 'Phone call at 4HIQKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------- Install -------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 1226164 __________B7___ V. Description of the invention (丨 4) Step 1 906 is operated by the user To route. Telephone numbers are generally included in a telephone directory that a user can access on the display. In addition, the catalog may include patterns that provide highly recognizable visual memory symbols to allow users to easily remember the information contained in a particular catalog item. The present invention uses routing information to guide a call. Because both the original data from the data conversation and the new IP phone data use Internet protocols, the present invention can provide seamless integration between the two parties to provide virtually simultaneous phone and non-phone data communication. The availability of packet switching elements in a coupled network makes this process easy to implement. In a packet-switched network, a data unit-type packet is transmitted from a source, such as a user terminal, a computer, an application in a computer, or other data processing or data communication device, to a destination, which can be simply Another data processing or data communication device with the same characteristics. In web documents, the 'device itself is often called the user. Data blocks or frames are transmitted through links along paths between network nodes. Each block includes a packet and control information with a header and trailer type, which are added to the packet when leaving each node. In addition to the destination address block, the header usually includes several secondary fields, such as the operation code, source address, serial number, and length code. The end of the file generally includes techniques for generating redundancy checks, such as cyclic redundancy codes (CRC) for detection errors. At the other end of the link, the receiving node strips the control information, performs the required synchronization and error detection ', and then reinserts the control information into the packet to leave. In part ’In the development of the network to allow access to the host computer, the packet exchange can meet the needs of low-cost data communications

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- ^ -------- Order --- ------ (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention The destination computer has been developed to offload the communication processing tasks that previously required the host computer to handle. The communication processor is suitable for the interface with the host computer and is used to route packets along the network. Therefore, such processors are often referred to as Packet concentrators. Data concentrators have also been developed as interfaces with host computers and are used to route packets along the network. Basically, data concentrators are used to exchange several less-used links to a smaller number More heavily used connections. They are often used in conjunction with packet switching and are used before packet switching. In virtual circuits (VC) or connection-oriented transmission, packet delivery Data transmission is accomplished through the network with a predetermined endpoint-to-endpoint path, where user packets share connections and switch facilities with a large number of users when packets are transmitted over the network. Packets may need to be on the network The nodes between the transmission links are stored until the individual external links along the entire path are forwarded. In connectionless transmission, that is, in another packet exchange data transmission mode, the data path through the network is not An initial connection is required. In this mode, individual data packets carrying the destination address are transferred from the source to the destination via the intermediary node through the network, and do not need to be delivered to the destination in the order they are transmitted. Query step 1908. According to the user data, the telex communication on the combined network is restricted. Preferably, the user data is included in the rule database. By determining the user data in the rule database, Location, gauge 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 127 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the Please fill in this page for matters.) Packing -------- Order · -------- · Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property Staff Printed by Cooperative Cooperatives Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property Bureau Employees Printed by Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 A7 _____B7__ 5. Description of the invention (丨 W) The database can provide seamless cross-location registration, without the need to copy the database in different networks. Using the rule database, users using the Internet in Europe can Get the same phone service as provided above in the United States. Preferably, the computer as an interface with the Internet includes multimedia equipment such as speakers and microphones. With the help of the multimedia equipment, the computer allows users to use the telephone communication with little or no interference when accessing the Internet. Multimedia computer speakers are used to receive phone audio from the network, and microphones are used to send phone data to the network. Data mining The present invention includes a data mining capability, which provides the ability to analyze network management data to find patterns and associations across multiple dimensions. The system also constructs a data behavior model that predicts future growth or problems and makes managing the network easier in a professional and cost-effective manner. A technology called data mining allows users to search large databases and discover patterns hidden in data. Therefore, data mining is to efficiently discover valuable and non-obvious information from large data centers, and focus on the automatic discovery of new things and the hidden relationships in the data. The term data mining comes from the idea that unprocessed materials are commercial data, and data mining algorithms are miners who search through a large amount of unprocessed data to find valuable natural minerals for corporate information. Because data can be stored in many different formats and because data prices can have many different meanings, in the past, data mining applications have been written to perform specific data mining operations, and the encoding between applications is only There are few or no longer available. Therefore, every asset

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ 11 ^ Packing -------- Order ---------. (Please read the note 3 on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 __B7_ V. Description of the Invention (\ Call) The data mining applications are written from scratch, so that The program development process is long and expensive. Although the treasure trove of business information discovered by data mining applications can be quite expensive, if they are expensive and not discovered in a timely manner, they become less useful. Returning to the analogy of mining, even if the price of gold is US $ 900 per ounce, if it takes rainy years and US $ 901 per ounce to dig it out of the ground, then no one is interested in mining gold. Accurate predictions rely heavily on the ability to analyze large amounts of data. This work is very difficult because of the large amount of data and the complexity of the analysis that must be performed. Because the data is often located in multiple databases, the problem is exacerbated. Because each database has a different internal file structure, only very little relevant information is obviously stored in the database. Conversely, important information resides only in hidden relationships in the various items of the database. Recently, artificial intelligence technology has been developed to assist users in discovering these relationships, and in some cases, discovering relationships automatically. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a data mining program 2000 according to the present invention. The data mining program 2000 starts with an identifyillg step 2002. In step 2002, the system identifies patterns and associations of system data on the hybrid communication system. Preferably, the system data is analyzed through multiple dimensions to provide better predictions of future system behavior. In the model building step 2004, the system establishes a network behavior model based on the template and correlation identified in step 2002. Data mining is a program that uses specific techniques to discover patterns in the data, and allows users to perform a fairly extensive search of large databases to find out what might not be

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau's employees' cooperative prints clothing 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention U3) Relevant information clearly stored in the database. Generally speaking, the user specifies a search group or strategy and system at first, and then retrieves the template and relationship corresponding to the strategy from the stored data. Such a search system allows searching in multiple databases. The extracted patterns and relationships can be: (1) used by users or data analysts to build an estimation model; (2) used to restructure an existing model; and / or (3) organized into a target A summary of the database, such as prediction step 2006. In prediction step 2 006, the system predicts future network behavior according to the model produced in step 2 04. There are two existing types of data mining: from top to down, and from bottom to up. Both forms can operate independently in an existing system. The whole-to-detail system is also called "pattern validation", "verification-driven data mining", and "confirmatory analysis". This is a form of analysis that allows analysts to express knowledge, confirm that knowledge, and obtain valid and invalid reasons. In the confirmation step from the whole to the details, the materials that need to be refuted and the materials that support consideration are needed. From detail to holistic system is also called data exploration. From the details to the overall system, discover the knowledge generally in the form of samples in the data.

Finally, in the management step 2008, the network is managed according to the future behavior of the network. Data mining involves the development of tools to analyze large databases to extract useful information from them. Like data mining applications, customer purchase patterns can be derived from large customer transaction databases by analyzing transaction records. Such purchasing habits can provide invaluable market capital 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) _ IIIIIII ^^ ·! 111! · Printed by the Consumer Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Intellectual Property Bureau 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention. For example, by knowing the customer's purchasing patterns, sellers can create more efficient store displays and more effective inventory control. As a further example, if it is known that after a customer purchases the first item, the same customer can be expected to a certain degree of probability to purchase a specific second item within a predetermined time after the first purchase. Merchandise, the catalog company can send bulk mail more efficiently. The classification of data records used to extract useful information is an important part of data mining. An important point of the present invention is to establish a classifier from records of a known category to classify records of other unknown categories. As is generally known in the art, classifiers are generated from input data (also known as a training set) and include multiple records. Each stroke is identified by a class label. The input data is analyzed to develop accurate descriptions or models for each record category. According to the category description ’classifier, you can classify future records, called test data, and its category label is unknown.

As an example, consider a credit card company that has a large database of cardholders and wants to develop a profile for each customer level to accept or reject future credit applicants. Suppose cardholders are divided into two levels, and according to their credit history, they are divided into good and bad customers. Use this classification to solve the problem. First, a training set including hierarchical customer data is provided to the classifier as input. The output of the classifier is a description of each category, that is, good or bad, which can then be used to process future credit card applicants. Lai Si's classification applications are also found in other areas, such as target markets, medical diagnosis, processing effectiveness, and store location search. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order --- ------ 4 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 _-_B7_ V. Description of the invention In the program, a very large training set with millions of examples is common. Therefore, it is important to have a classifier in these applications that can be well adjusted and can handle this size. ° Its other advantages Because, the ability to classify large training data can also lead to improved classification accuracy. Another ideal characteristic of data mining classifiers is extremely short training time; that is, the ability to quickly construct classification descriptions from the training set. The invented method is based on a decision-tree classifier. Decision trees are highly developed techniques for segmenting data samples into a set of coverage decision rules. They are concise and have additional advantages that can be transformed into simple In addition, they can be easily converted into Structured Query Language (SQL) statements to access the database, and can achieve comparable or better classification accuracy than other classification methods. Another data mining classifier technology solves the problem of memory limitation, and at the same time improves the execution time by dividing the data into sub-sets suitable for memory size and developing a classifier of parallel sub-sets. The output of the classifier is then different in different ways. Algorithms are combined to obtain the final classification. This method greatly reduces the execution time. Another method classifies the data in batches. The network management telecom industry uses new rules, new competitors, new customers and unprecedented Demand is changing rapidly. Service providers around the world are facing similar challenges, similar risks and similar struggles, and remain profitable in the face of more competition, declining market share, and price pressure. When providers Surface 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 132 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Grid (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention In face of these challenges, their suppliers must also find innovative ways to pass on prices, or they will lose business opportunities. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page.) The focus of any telecom provider is on the services it provides. The main goal is "to much less": to get new services at a lower price, faster introduction of services, and better service quality. These goals can only be achieved by automation of customer maintenance procedures, operation support procedures, and strong automatic links between customer service supply management and underlying management resources. Some service provider providers also complete and operate the network infrastructure, while others choose to outsource this part of their enterprise. Regardless of direct operation or outsourcing, the effective development of network infrastructure is an integrated part of the service delivery chain and directly affects the service quality and cost perceived by end customers. In order to understand the information flow and relationship between service providers and between the service provider and its underlying network infrastructure, a reference model showing related enterprise relationships is proposed. Service providers may face very different regulatory pressures, and the competitive threat posed by each may be very different. However, in general, service providers share three characteristics. They all: rely heavily on the effective management of information and communication networks to maintain competitiveness; adopt a service-oriented approach to implement their businesses and their networks; and the consumer co-operatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs print their services Automation with network management processes, sometimes completely rebuilding the way they run the enterprise. Currently, the interfaces that service and network infrastructure providers rely on to exchange management information are mostly actual possession or involve exclusive, low-level interactions. . 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 133 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ^^ ___B7__ 5. There is an opportunity To establish common specifications and agreements that allow providers, their customers, and their suppliers to work together more efficiently than before. To achieve this goal, we must first confirm the corporate goals of each interface, and establish a role, and then make sure that the technical work of implementing the electronic interface can be well discovered and passed the required corporate benefits. In the following description, various terms and abbreviations will be used, and their definitions are as follows: ATM Asynchronic Transfer Mode BPM Business Process Model EM Element Management EML Element Management Element Management Layer ITU International Telecommunications Union ITU-T ITU — Telecommunications Sector NE Network Element NEM Network Element Management NM Network Network Management NML Network Management Layer NMP Network Management Program NO Network Operator 〇LO Other Licensed Operator OMT Object Model Object Modelling Technique 〇NO Other Network Operator 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 134 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----- ------ install -------- order --------- (Please read first Note on the back? Matters need to be filled out on this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer CooperativesΪ226164 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of Invention (\ Gu) SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SLA Service Level Agreement SM Service Management (Service Management) SML Service Management Layer (SP) Service Provider (SMART) Service Management Automation and Re-engineering Team (TMN) Telecommunication Management Network ( Telecommunications Management Network) TOM Telecommunications Operations Map UML Unified Modelling Language The reference model shown in Figure 21 shows service providers 2 100, their customers 2 102, and suppliers 2 The main point of contact between 104. ^ The broad scope of managing automation opportunities lies in the role of the company and the relationships shown in Figure 21. Each has specific corporate objectives, specifying the level and type of management information to be exchanged, the robustness of the management interface, and the priority of industrial agreements pursued in the area of interest. The process that drives network management is from the customer 2102, through service management to network management, and then to an external source device as part of the "management price chain", which provides communication services. This chain can include 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 135 at the delivery end. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm). --- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (Head I) Point-to-point service for other participating services Person (or network operator) 2106. The interface to supplier 2 104 and other providers / operators 2106 is an external interface. These were the initial acquisition interfaces, but subsequent deployments became very operational. Suppliers of these products or services need to ensure that their management systems directly support the internal corporate processes of service provider 2 100 to ensure the most efficient service delivery. Therefore, agreeing to an open, procedural core group and information process has potential benefits for everyone. For service provider 2 100, it expands the source of potential suppliers; for supplier 2104, it creates a larger potential customer base for its products, and still has room for competitive innovation. The following roles have been identified to describe relationships in the industry, related to service and network management: Customer: One or more services provided by one or more service providers (such as a business entity that may be another service provider) Recipients of the service. Service Provider (SP): Generally refers to an organization that provides telex communication services to customers and end users on a price list or contract basis. The SP may or may not have to operate the network. The SP may or may not be a customer of another SP or network operator. Network Operator: An organization that operates a telex communications infrastructure. The network operator can also be an SP.

Vendor: An individual or organization that provides network products or services (such as maintenance or management facilities) to a service provider or network operator. These products can include telecom equipment, computing platforms or management application software. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Zhuyin? Please fill in this page again for details) l226l64 A7 ____ B7____ l. Description of the invention (⑼) The following interaction impacts network management procedures and directly drives the need for interface specifications in the type of information protocol to be automated. Interaction with Service Management This is one of the main relationships of network management and serves as the main source of information and action requirements for performing tasks. Service management is responsible for managing the customer's perception of each individual service provided, and generally addresses certain types of contractual agreements. Therefore, the purpose is to operate customer behavior as an interaction with network management. Interaction with vendors or equipment provided by vendors Most traditional service providers own and operate networks to deliver services. Service delivery should always include at least one provider as the role of network operator. For these providers / operators, network operations are a point of internal corporate functions rather than external interfaces. However, because most service providers do not produce their own network equipment, they rely on equipment vendors from whom they can purchase equipment to help them achieve their automation goals. For example, the ability to use devices configured in a common way, or the use of common format and project alerts or performance data, is important to the overall benefits of service and network management automation. To get the most from automation efforts, the acquired equipment must be able to receive and function under common high-level instructions, and communicate performance and usage-related information in a common way that meets the needs of the provider. Interaction with customers Most service providers see the need for automated management links to their customers ’, at least with certain types of customers or certain types of services

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page)

n H ϋ 1_1 口 一 Βϋ i_i Βϋ n · n I p Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed on clothing by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ___B7_ V. Explanation of the Invention 03. These interactions are mainly generated with service management, which acts as an agent for customers' network management needs. Interaction with Other Providers Worldwide alliances and statutory actions generate significant interactions among service providers. Today, these often involve manual interventions, which represent unacceptable costs and frequent severe declines in service quality for customers. Some interactions between providers are similar to those between service providers and customers. However, the transaction volume, level of detail and speed required for the information to be exchanged between providers will be described in roughly different implementation protocols. Figure 22 shows a simplified view of the procedures used by service and network providers. As shown in Figure 22, it shows several operation management programs provided to include customer maintenance 2200, service management 2202, and network management 2204. It should be understood that the actual implementation of the management system may not reflect the precise separation between services and network management systems 2202, 2204. Providers and operators can make their own decisions in the context of their application's management environment to use the agreed-upon information flow to interoperate based on their own corporate judgment. A network management program 2204 will be defined, and each program will be mapped to its component functions. The model of network management program 22 04 and functions is based on the following considerations: The decomposition of service management from the whole to the details requires the structure of the guiding program, and the supporting functions need to be confirmed in the functional cluster group.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation—I—Order— (Please read the Please fill in this page again for attention) A7 1226164 B7____ V. Description of Invention (bg1) Place the network management procedures and functions in a one-level management structure. The network management program 2 2 04 and the procedures linking these have been deduced from the discussions and interviews with corporate planners and operators among several service providers, and represent the corporate orientation of the network management structure (by the overall To the details) perspective. Functional cluster groups are derived from standards and reflect structures and terms that are familiar to operations and planning staff. A procedure describes the process or part of an activity that solves a particular problem. For the procedure, it is not important how accessible devices and data flow during the analysis phase; that is, whether the data is submitted or accessed in a central database is not proposed. However, procedures are related to triggers that cause them to take action. Function A processing unit (initiated by a person or via an automated action) that has specific, well-defined inputs and outputs. For functions (different from procedures), data is the most important, because functions are described as processing units and related data output and input. Functionality tends to a single purpose full-time and high surface refinement. Programs typically use multiple functions, and a given function can be used by one or more programs. Therefore, mainly, there is a many-to-many mapping relationship between programs and functions. According to the TMN standard, functions with related or complementary capabilities are grouped into a functional cluster group, which then provides operational support to each program. It envisages that the protocol is feasible on high-level procedures and standardized functional cluster groups without having to restrict the method of mapping to subroutines via intermediary strings. In individual organizations 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 139 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ · Installation ----- --- Order --------- M__wi (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employee Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A7 V. Description of Invention (Vf) This maintains the flexibility of the application and implementation of this network, and provides support for the underlying functions and reconciliation of the broad program structure used by these functions. Figure 23 shows the relationship between program 2 3 00, function 23 02 and data 23 04. Function 23 02 can be thought of as a mechanical response to a specific input (and fairly directly automated), where program 23 00 is a triggered response of one or more applications with enterprise rules (which can be complex automation). With structured program 23 00, function 2302 and data 2304 (see Figure 23), their relationship can be made even better. Function-oriented perspective support program 23 00 for understanding the content of program 2 3 00 supports the whole-to-detail analysis program 2300, by confirming the possible target functional abilities of program 23 00 in performing their roles ° Individual program areas ( Using technologies such as OMT or UML) the overall analysis and design can be handled by individual working groups, who use telex to operate maps as a common background for their work. At the beginning, the analysis of the information flow needs to guide the structure of the overall operating environment into the main procedures and confirm the content of the links between them. The following steps can be used as a distinction for program development. Identify actors. Actors provide triggers to the corporate area to model external matters. Of course, external parties identified as being dependent on the modeled person, and external matters that do not provide triggers are not called actors. Describe the different roles each actor can perform. Confirm the trigger. Each actor in a particular role can provide and receive several triggers. Start with the trigger provided by the actor 'and model the trigger received by the actor after modeling the program flow.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 140 ----------- Installation -------- Order-- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by A7, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description ((w) Confirm the response to the trigger. What activity sequence (Process) Will be taken in response to a trigger? Group activities. All responses to all triggers can be grouped together into activity collections. These collections are called enterprise procedures. Procedures 23 00 are at the management level (such as network management ), Because they represent the main area of operational responsibility and provide a clear distinction between the relationships between individual processes. In the case of TMN management, process flow goes from network management to service or down to the network The road component management takes place vertically and within the network management itself. Indeed, the process used to support the service management is one of the main drivers of the holistic-to-detail approach to delivering corporate profits. Another thing to know The problem is that the dynamics of the life cycle of each layer are likely to be very different, and the implementation must be well understood. Now let ’s explain the overview of the names of programs, functional cluster groups, and data areas. Functional cluster groups and data areas are Confirm that it belongs to the network management layer, but can be used by programs in other layers when appropriate. For example, the network configuration function can be directly used by the service configuration program for service configuration. These relationships are A complete view of the requirements for placing these functions is important. Figure 24 shows the high-level structure of the network management program 2400, the support function cluster group 2402, and the data area on which it depends. The program is lower in Figure 22 It has been confirmed in the layer. For example, the network supply may use several functional cluster groups 2402, such as the actual selection of the supply and network path settings and tests to verify that it is usable. About 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW ⑷ This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Packing -------- Order --------- ^ __ wi (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 1226164 A7 V. Description of the invention (\ φΙ) Data 2404 and network configuration can be used to support these functions. Figure 25 shows the network management telex communication operation in the TMN Map placement. -------------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This section will describe the procedure shown in Figure 24 in more detail. Each Program descriptions are supported by a program flow chart that shows the links between the program and the rest of the overall operation. For a particular area of network operation, these programs can be implemented in a typical provider environment, making technically relevant For business reasons, the program area can be used several times to co-process with the different components involved at the layer of the network and where it is divided. For example, managing mobile services can involve the management of a mobile network, which itself uses several fixed network areas (which may be provided by different network operators). Network management in such an environment can involve using network provisioning for each network domain separately to support the configuration of the entire mobile service. This implies that the network provisioning process may be used many times in different ways to achieve the necessary network management of support services. To accommodate this situation, the procedures described here must be recognized as potentially layered in the same way, so that telex communication networks and services can be incorporated into the hierarchy. The flowchart of the printed procedure printed by the employee's consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs includes a procedure box, which lists the procedure work or tasks, and a set of output and input information flows to confirm the relevant procedures and other parts of the operation Important interaction. Process arrows are labeled according to the nature of the interaction, and the procedures or entities with which they interact are shown at the end of the procedure with smaller boxes. In the diagram, only trigger signals (interactions that control program operations) are included, and other data streams cannot exist (because there are many ways to exchange information between programs). And network management

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm, " " " ---------- 1226164 Employee Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative B7 V. Description of the Invention (\ 43) The trigger of the external interaction is clearly marked. The trigger can be generated from the following situations: Service management, where these NM programs provide support to the service management process (such as service problem resolution triggers) Network maintenance and recovery). In the network management layer, according to the needs (triggering) that are particularly related to network management. (For example, the network plan detects the need to re-deploy network resources to handle, for example, a local area network. Overload.) Externally supplied (but owned, leased, or contracted) equipment, or network (ie, managed from the underlying component / subnet). In addition, in each program area, Figure 24 The structure and functional cluster group 2402 supporting the program area and the prominent related data area 2402 are re-created together. Network Planning and Development Figure 26 shows the network planning and development process, including input And output triggers. This program is responsible for setting the rules for network planning, installation, and maintenance. '' The application of new technologies and provider strategies, the development and acceptance of new network types, and the description of standard network configurations used in operations.

In addition, this process is responsible for network capacity design to meet specific service requirements under anticipation to ensure that the network can be properly 'monitored, controlled, and charged. This procedure is also responsible for ensuring that sufficient resources are available to meet the projected demand. According to the required network capacity, the order is sent to the provider or other network operators (other netwc ^ k operators, ΟΝΟ), and the website preparation and installation order is sent. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper standard applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 1226164 A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (丨 44) Inventory management or third-party network builder (work order). The design of the logical network configuration is provided to the network provider. Input trigger (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) New service description from service planning and development New network technology from the supplier Capacity planning from service planning and development From network supply, inventory management and network Capacity requirements for maintenance and restoration Output work orders triggered to suppliers and / or ΝΟΟ Work orders for network inventory management or network architects Configuration requirements for network supplies Performance goals for network data management Network maintenance Maintenance rules for restoration and recovery. Work orders for network inventory management output data for service planning and development plans (ie, data generated during this process). Purchase, installation, performance, and maintenance rules. This includes standard network configuration (such as SDH ring configuration) and routing restrictions / required network capabilities (including performance goals). Logical network configuration development of planned network capabilities printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau staff of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives Process responsibilities Development and implementation procedures 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 144 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨 Λ5) Setting the architecture agreement with the supplier According to the network technology and architecture, develop a new network and architecture, and determine the network capacity required for network capacity planning. Planning network capacity conversion (including dismantling of obsolete networks) Release orders to suppliers and ONO Planning physical location facilities required for logical network configuration planning Figure 27 shows the functional groups and network planning and development procedures Data area. Network Provisioning Figure 28 shows the network provisioning process, including input and output triggering. This procedure is responsible for the configuration of the network to ensure that the network capacity is ready to supply the network. When needed, it implements network provisioning to meet specific service requirements and changes configuration changes to resolve network issues. This program must specify and manage the resources to which the ID is supplied, as well as specific examples of routine supply of customer service (especially simple services, such as POTS) that will allow them to be noticed by other programs-generally not involving network provisioning Programs, but can be handled by a service provider directly from a pre-configured set described later. Input trigger The network capacity that can be obtained from the network inventory comes from the configuration requirements of network planning and development. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 145 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7__ V. Description of invention (\ team) From the network of service configuration Supply request (to support new service requests) Configuration request output trigger from network maintenance. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Network capacity requirements for network planning The network configuration is ready (Including the successful identification code) give the service configuration work order for network inventory management (if any actual work is needed) start monitoring of network data management require output data for low-level management path configuration (ie, Data generated in this procedure) Network identification of the installed logical network configurator service Supported network identification and related procedures Responsible network (re) configuration Logical network management identifier Designation of test network to ensure operation Figure 29 Draw function groups and data areas of the network provisioning process. Online Inventory Management Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Figure 30 shows the online inventory management process, including input and output triggering. This procedure is responsible for anything related to physical equipment and the management of those equipment. This procedure involves the physical configuration of the network in terms of equipment installation and acceptance, but it also involves procedures for handling and maintenance of supplies. Software and hardware upgrades are also the responsibility of this process. Input trigger 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 146 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7_ V. Description of the invention 〇 的) From the network planning and / or network supply Work order Change notification from the component manager Work order from network maintenance and recovery (start / stop / cancel) Start monitoring of network data management Requires new / spare / repair product equipment available from supplier / The update output from the supplier triggers the maintenance schedule / ready to the network maintenance and recovery process. The network capacity available to the network supply process. The network planning process issues a device (new or spare) order request notification / order / Write a letter to the supplier to provide capacity instructions to the service market process to output data (that is, the data generated in this process) Physical network data maintenance schedule Inventory / repair information procedure Responsibility Physical network installation and management network The operation management and maintenance procedures are responsible for keeping inventory information consistent with the actual network. Figure 31 shows the functional group of the network inventory management program. Group and profile area. Network Maintenance and Recovery 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 147 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) • -------------- (please first Read the notes on the back and fill out this page).%-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed A7 B7_ 5. Description of the invention Maintenance and recovery procedures, including input and output triggers. This procedure is responsible for maintaining the operational quality of the network in accordance with the required network performance goals. Network maintenance activities can be preventive (such as scheduled routine maintenance) or Corrective. Corrective maintenance can be based on an error or an indication that the problem may develop (front-end). This procedure initiates testing and analysis to determine the cause and impact of the problem, and informs of the possible impact on quality Service management. This procedure can send requests for corrective actions. Enter maintenance rules / policies / quality management that trigger service problem resolution. Component errors / events from component management. Normal / preventive maintenance requirements for network planning. Maintenance activities from network inventory management. Start / complete performance degradation from network data management. Indication output triggers work orders (start / stop / cancel). Recovery request to the network provisioning program service or SLA affects network problems and resolution notifications to service problem resolution services or SLA affects network activities to service problem resolution capacity requirements to output data to network planning and development procedures Data generated) Historical data of network problems, analysis of testing and maintenance procedures (including testing) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 148 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) ----------- install -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Description (\ Μ) Network Quality Maintenance and Recovery Historical data on maintaining network problems and performance Figure 33 shows the functional groups and functions of the network maintenance and recovery process. Data area Network Data Management Figure 34 shows the network data management process, including input and output triggers. This process is responsible for the collection of data and events, which are mainly used for network performance and traffic analysis and For optimization purposes. This information can also be used as input to the accounting (rating and discounting) process located at the service management level. This process must provide sufficient and relevant information to verify compliance / non-compliance with the service level agreement. However, service level agreements are not known in NML. This process must be confident that network performance goals can be tracked and that notifications can be provided when performance is not met (critical thresholds exceeded, performance degradation, etc.). This includes information such as capacity, usage, and traffic. In some cases, changes in traffic conditions can lead to changes in the network (provided via the network) to control traffic, such as congested call gaps. Degraded network capacity will result in more resources required for network planning. Input triggers come from network planning and development performance goals come from service quality management or rating / discount usage / performance data request come from network supply and / or network inventory start monitoring request output trigger performance drop notification to network Maintenance service quality reduction notice to service problem resolution 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 149 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Shang- ------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 1226164 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (\ 5〇) Use the information as the service management as Accounting capacity requirements give network planning and development network changes to component managers' flow control (including start / stop monitoring) output data (ie, data generated in the process) usage / performance data historical performance and traffic The analysis program is responsible for the collection, correlation, and formatting of data and events. Determine network performance based on capacity, usage, and traffic. Provide notification of performance degradation. Implement flow control functions. Figure 35 shows the functional groups and data areas of the network data management process. The impact of interactions between special network technologies on the architecture of the management solution will be presented here. In this case, it is advantageous to establish a technical boundary to distinguish these network management capabilities related to network technology from general or common network management capabilities to a wider range of operator operations. The main benefits of defining this boundary are as follows: For service providers: Reduce the impact of the introduction of new network technologies on NML and the above, thereby reducing system costs and accelerating the introduction of new network technologies. (For example, 'existing general applications can be applied to the management of new technologies.' Reduce the cost of technology-dependent components and the capabilities they provide 'because suppliers can freely innovate below the boundary and can solve their solutions 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 150 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order-- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs I226164 Invention Statement (\ 5 \) Lots of business opportunities. (Service providers should be free to buy only the functional products (applications) they need.) Allow higher levels of functionality (for example, above the border) to enable more competitiveness (for general applications Program creates market potential). Upgrade to a more structured management solution (with the potential to increase resilience and easier evolution to new services and management capabilities). Increasing the price (i.e., greater functionality) of their offerings to suppliers allows them to add appropriate higher-level management capabilities in a licensed manner by crossing technology-independent boundaries. Improve the potential for growth in market size (due to greater functionality and rapid SP acquisition). Enhanced functionality through network equipment or software support. Potential to improve new revenue. Provide additional space within the scope of the technology to provide management capacity development and innovative solutions. (Common structure allows for the needs of an operator. Suppliers focus on application structure and functionality, as well as more sophisticated goals and price management solutions. Job requirements will be quite different for new operators.) Improving system integration in supplier applications Efficiency, so that the supplier's price chain can operate more efficiently. Relationship with Telex Communication Operation Map The functional area discussed here can be encapsulated into functional blocks in the telex operation map structure, and the range of selected functional blocks can be -------- ---- Equipment -------- Order --------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by Consumer Cooperatives

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 151 The paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨 51) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this (Page) reflects the differences between the general and specific technology management mentioned above. Figure 36 shows the structure of the network management layer. Based on this basis, the functional block shown in Figure 36 was selected to distinguish the network management capabilities (at the node level) related to the component manager from the subnet managers (that is, for some managed network areas) Or field). Note that this is just one possible way of structure. The acquisition of managed network technology service providers is often based on a combination of some aspects of component management and network management wrapped in this type of subnetwork management. This allows the managed subnet realm to be accessed as a network area, not just a series of individual network nodes. Subnets can be defined as: based on the particular network technology used (such as SDH or ATM), together with related management, obtained in a package; based on geographic separation; because areas with specific management functionality can be Is supported; and subnet boundaries are defined based on many other criteria. The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints clothing for employees' cooperatives. However, it does not need to be obvious the functionalities of molecular network managers and component managers. In fact, the balance between these perspectives will depend on the deployment constraints and internal design constraints of the technology proposed by the procurement department. Therefore, the distribution of functionality can vary greatly from one implementation to another. The factors that affect the functional distribution are the following examples: Aggregation of performance and usage data can be optimally processed at the node level to reduce the volume of data streams transmitted to higher-level management.

The design / routing of PVCs must be performed from a central location based on their nature before being sent to the lower level work performed by the node level. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 meals) 1226164 A7

Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics Detailed configuration functions can be optimally processed at the node level to provide a fully defined configuration mechanism and to reduce data duplication. The mapping of network-oriented and node-oriented resource selection (for example, network routing to device port selection) can be optimized in different ways for each technology type and different types of the same technology. This can lead to different functional distributions in each technology area to support similar capabilities that exist at higher levels of management at the boundary. Restrictions on deployment time The compute state (for example, program processing power) of the infrastructure on which the management solution is deployed. The physical computing architecture used by the SP. For example, it is better to express management services through a standard and open interface from a central area to reduce support agreement stacking costs and reduce the impact of computing infrastructure evolution. The degree of adaptation to the lack of functionality and overlap. Management division requirements; physical (geographical area) or logical (customer group, product group, etc.). The main criteria for functional segmentation are its functions: Functions that are logically related to other choices, which support certain overall management features and capabilities. This is the main area of connection with the telecom network operation map, because the procedures and procedures defined in the telecom network operation map are used to confirm which functions are logically related and should be considered together. Specify a technical subnet, or consider that a considerable degree of knowledge about the internals of network technology is required. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 153 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · Installation -------- Order- -------- (Please read the note on the back and fill in this page first) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Industrial common interfaces to evaluate and develop. Service providers can decide where they need industrial agreements based on the degree of inefficiency caused by human interaction or lack of common projects. These inefficiencies can prove to be excessive errors and lengthy The process of processing, or the inability to respond quickly to new market opportunities. Network Development Process This process requires policy and design rule information to enable exchange between network operators and their suppliers However, it is a highly interactive and not easy to automate process, as each network development has its own unique set of characteristics. In some cases, the results need to modify or extend the details of other areas Procedures and functions to accommodate the effective introduction of new services and technologies. This process is the entry point into the service management life cycle. Network Planning Process This process uses capacity planning and capacity requirements to generate equipment supply, Configuration and construction of specific orders. This ordering interface can be executed automatically to improve the efficiency of the program. Internal work order forms may be automated by some regional private interfaces (such as job schedulers or planning tools, etc.). External ordering is in the area of traditional Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), and the most recent engineering ordering process (such as CALS). This process supports service and network management lifecycles. Network Provisioning Process 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 154 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) ----------- · Installation -------- Order --- ------ (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (\ SS) This procedure accepts configuration requests from customer maintenance and service management procedures and from other NML procedures. The result of the supply is the logical configuration of the network elements provided via EML, or the physical configuration will require network inventory. For the former, automation according to industrial protocols is basic; for the latter, interface automation may be a regional issue. However, if network inventory is performed by another organization, automation based on industrial protocols is ideal. This program is the basic supporting component of the customer maintenance order procedure and the service management service configuration procedure. Network Inventory Management Process This process supports several network-level processes and needs to be automatically upgraded to be able to track the physical status of the network inventory on the EML interface. The actual work is performed by labor management, which may require an automated interface that does not need to follow industrial protocols. This process is a fundamental building block of the network management lifecycle and supports those service management and customer maintenance lifecycles that require actual changes to the network. Network maintenance and recovery procedures Maintenance and recovery procedures strongly influence customers' perception of service quality. Fast and accurate processing of problem reports, alerts, follow-up diagnostics, and recovery requires precise handling of a large number of events. This process is essential to support network management, service management, and customer maintenance lifecycle. Network Data Management Process There are two different aspects of the network data management process. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 155 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order-- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 1226164 A7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics B7 V. Description of the invention Collect, collate and correlate a large amount of data, and effectively move them to a system that can perform rating and accounting. Data transfer requires high-level integration and auditing capabilities. Monitoring network traffic and performance conditions This aspect is important when network degradation often results in network failure. Detection and causes of problems at this stage can improve customers' perception of service quality. It is also essential for network planning and development processes because it gives early warning of network capacity exhaustion. This process is fundamental to supporting network management, service management, and customer maintenance lifecycles. TMN and Network Management Role Telecommunications Management Network

Management Network (TMT) represents a series of architectural and interface agreements that focus on the foundations for managing telex communication networks and services, including planning, installation, supply, operation, maintenance, and management. It is defined by Ιτυ Τ, ITU-T is the international body responsible for the development of telex communication standards. TMN provides management functions to telex communication networks and services, and provides its own communication with telex communication networks, services, and other TMNs. In this paper, the telecom network is assumed to include digital and analogue telecommunications equipment and related supporting equipment. Telecommunications services in this article | service = range of capabilities available to customers. 1 In the TMN-level management architecture, the network management layer is the main integration layer between the component management layer and the service management layer. Figure 37 shows the stomach

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back first? Matters before filling out this page) One Pack ------- -Order ---- 156 1226164 A7 __________B7_ V. Description of the Invention (\ S〇) ------------ · Install i — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), level Management structure. Its basic function is to bring the information together from the component management system 3700 that supports it, then integrate and correlate, and summarize the information under most young people to send the relevant information to the service management system 3704. The information is generally related to the technical characteristics of the network involved, but it should describe an end-to-end point of view, which is (multiple) technically consistent to support customer service. In the opposite direction, the network management layer 3702 receives the information from the service management layer 3 704, processes it and passes related commands and data to the appropriate component management system 3700. However, network management 3 7 02 is not just an arbiter between EML and SML. Network management 3 7 02 has its own responsibilities; for example, ‘network provisioning and network error management. The main issue is that management responsibilities will be placed at the level of the appropriate information, rather than giving all responsibilities to SML · 3704. For example, if a non-service-affecting network error occurs, that is, the backbone of the SDH ring fails, the network management layer 3702 can handle the error without notifying SML. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Although ITU-T and other places have given a lot of valuable attention to "higher-level" management, many of the work currently done by standards and other institutions reflects recommendations, standards and Implementation agreement, which describes the point of view of the component management layer 3 00, and the work that is now being processed by the network management layer 3 7 02 very quickly. Many of these important tasks can be defined as the rules of use of the equipment to be managed, rather than as automated information management processes to complete the integration of customer service management. Much work can be done to analyze service management 3 704 and try to understand and organize service delivery

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164

V. Description of the invention (\ α) The enterprise needs of the printers and network operators of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The knowledge gained from this activity can be applied to determine which activities on NML need to be performed first to document requirements for support service management, detailed information processes, and subsequent specifications. These information flows can be between SML and NML, NMl and EML, or entirely within nml. Life-cycle related services Figure 38 shows the customer's maintenance of life. As mentioned earlier, many providers rebuild their business processes and take a common approach to confirming a set of service-related lifecycles. Generally speaking, the main life cycle is the service management life cycle. From the initial confirmation and service definition, through planning and development, deployment, operation, and final implementation of the service, this will drive other life cycles. However, there are many combinations that can be used for how a particular company is divided and named for their particular procedures and methods. The overall life cycle generally includes many of the same steps. Each step in the service life cycle has a causal relationship throughout the management (TMN) ^ c structure, as well as the causal activities required at the enterprise, service (customer maintenance), network, and component management levels. It should be noted that, even for providers, they express a major competitive differentiator 1 ~ -¾, {say | no multi-step is not a standard target. However, in order to be able to break down cost-effective management systems rather than developing custom software, mentioning & = has some solutions between management systems that span their own environment and their partner and customer management systems. Commonality is necessary. Equipment and software provision management Both need to recognize that it is beneficial to provide products that are easy to integrate into this environment. Therefore, the main emphasis here is on the service operation and control aspects of service management

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ^ --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 158 1226164 Intellectual property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed B7 for employees' co-operative cooperatives. 5. Inventive () M), which is more common in the way is acceptable and beneficial to the industry, rather than in some more additional prices and very Areas that may remain private. The next step is to identify typical confirmed lifetimes and discuss differences in their characteristics. Customer maintenance life cycle The customer maintenance process in the first row of Figure 22 forms a life cycle driven by the supply of specific examples of customer service. Because there may be many customers, many different services, and fairly dynamic needs to add, delete, or change services, this implies that in the service provider customer maintenance system (but not necessarily in each individual customer management system) high transaction Support, relatively low data volume per transaction, fairly high transaction integrity, and the need for low-level manual intervention to save costs. The service management process in the middle of the overall process model in Figure 22 forms a longer life cycle, which is driven by the introduction, modification, and revocation of different service products (or service levels). This life cycle involves generating specific policies, rules, procedures, and data templates that are used to organize and select service product items that can be utilized by customer maintenance procedures. As mentioned earlier, although there are many combinations that can be used for how a particular company divides and names its particular procedures and methods, the overall life cycle generally includes many of the same steps. Figure 39 illustrates a typical service management life cycle. Network Management Lifetime 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 159 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- ^ | ^ Cloth --- ----- Order --------- ^^ _ wi (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 1226164 V. Description of the invention (\ G〇) Figure 40 shows the network Management life. The network management process forms a lower level in the entire service management telex communication operation map 'and must respond and support both the customer maintenance process life cycle and the service management life cycle management. In addition to responding to these two process life cycles, the construction of network infrastructure introduces additional life cycles, including: a cycle of network planning and construction for capacity expansion, which has a fairly long cycle; and a technology evolution cycle, which ensures that The service involves technical changes as they continue. Although many planning procedures may be artificial in nature, certain steps need to be automated because of the large amount of data involved. This must be internally consistent and must be introduced into the operational network at fairly short intervals to maintain a high degree of integration in the process. Monitoring and maintenance procedures can involve the processing of a large number of small transactions. The integration of network management systems into the provider environment is one of the main issues that the industry must pay attention to. Until recently, real-time operations management was limited to the component management layer (that is, more or less independent alerting and configuration blocks), along with private internal developments within many network operators, to integrate important aspects such as alarm monitoring ). However, to move to NML, network management must support the corporate processes of network operators. Because network management procedures are quite complex, they create interoperability issues because all of these lifecycles must be resolved, integrated, and supported. Interface and / or support issues arise from the following areas: 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 160 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Printed 1226164 A7 ____B7___ 5. The description of the invention description (W |) lack of life support. Network management systems currently tend to support only the operational phases of network management. Interoperability issues with different network technologies and equipment from different vendors. Interoperability issues with other TMN layers. For example, network topology (the physical location of NE, cable management, and logical connectivity) is not supported, and the connection to service management does not exist. Segmentation, ownership, and support of network data. Different vendor (component or subnet management) systems tend to be built on the assumption that who owns specific data and who can access or change it. Different operators choose to manage data in different ways in their own environment, and many of their own systems make the same assumptions about location and ownership. Figure 41 shows how the aforementioned three lifecycles interact. An example of how the aforementioned high-level procedures can be broken down into selective subprograms is given below, which can be linked together in a work string (for example, using a workflow engine). These subroutines support high-level procedures and represent the means by which providers in the management integration network describe their daily or ideally possible tasks to support automated service management and pass them on to their customers. Figure 42 shows five high-level network management enterprise processes 4200 and thirteen sub-processes 4202. When knowledge is increased through analysis in this area, additional subroutines can be added. This is a little different from the situation described by the current standards, but it should be noted that none of them are all right or all wrong. To achieve the goal, both perspectives are necessary. Difficult work 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 161 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- Order- -------- line flf * (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 1226164 Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΗPrinted by the Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (\ α) The procedural point of view maps to a rich set of usable standards, and the company's profits are delivered via the deployable physical products. As this work progresses, further needs will be identified, affecting future standards. As a first step, it is useful to understand the relationship between programs and subroutines with Function Set Groups and Function Sets. Figure 43 helps define the location of the procedures and subroutines associated with Figure 24. Each program or subroutine can be composed of all or part of different functional cluster groups or function sets, and may be a linked workflow to achieve its purpose. Figure 44 shows how two examples of linked workflows can be used. Here are outlines of several examples of process automation that illustrate areas that have been identified as high-priority areas that are commonly needed in the industry. These examples are not exhaustive, but they can give an overview to industry people, telling them what capabilities can be dealt with first, as part of industry efforts. At the beginning, I noticed that each high-level program was mapped to several sub-programs, and each sub-program was mapped to several high-level programs to create a many-to-many relationship. Two examples are presented here to illustrate the flow of information between subroutines. Although the examples are arbitrarily chosen, they demonstrate the insights gained through the expansion of high-level procedures. The diagram shows the flow between the TMN layers and the subroutines that support high-level enterprise processes. Network Provisioning Process Example This example assumes that new services will be provisioned and the necessary network construction has already been performed. Figure 45 shows a flowchart of network provisioning. In Figure 45

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love). -------- Order ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) Line transfer · Employees' Cooperatives of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Qiu System 1226164 A7 __— __B7 _ V. The label of the invention description (丨 G3) shows the operation sequence, which starts from the service management 3704 (see page 37 The network provisioning request [i] of the service configuration program in the figure) ends with the configuration result [13], and starts monitoring [14] the messages sent to the service configuration and network data management programs, respectively. Network Data Management Process Example Figure 46 shows the flow of the network data management process. This example assumes that a new service has been provisioned and network data management has been triggered to begin performing its functions. Furthermore, it indicates that network data management has detected an out-of-specification condition and has notified service problem resolution procedures. Although in the previous example, each subroutine has many triggers and data streams, only the triggers and data streams associated with higher-level procedures are displayed. A detailed description of the inputs, outputs, and responsibilities of the three subroutines will be presented next. Performance Monitoring and Analysis Subroutine Figure 47 shows the network performance monitoring subroutine (service management / management of individual NLAs). This subroutine is responsible for managing, processing, and analyzing network and NE statistics to determine and track network performance to provide network performance evaluation. It is also responsible for collecting network performance data needed by service management to track service level agreements. SLA to network level mapping is also called Network Level Agreement (NLA). Input: 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 163 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install ------ order- ------- (Please read the note on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _______ __B7____ V. Description of the Invention (丨 call) Planning from the Internet And service / enterprise-level processes receive network performance and QoS performance goals. This can include performance requirements, criticality of degradation notification and organization / scheduling information, which is a daily report, which is a monthly report, and so on. Receive network QoS critical events, including error critical events, from network alerts / event correlations, and evaluate immediate or potential impact on NLA. Receive statistics from the network usage data subroutine, which can include detailed records of calls to exchange services to be able to track resources and connect to QOS and usage. Receive network test data from network test management to define performance, such as benchmarking and network / QOS evaluation. Receive network outage information from alerts / event correlations to be able to track resource / connection availability, MTBF, MTTR. Receive traffic violation from traffic monitor. Request web inventory and topology data from the web inventory management process to analyze performance data. Collecting and / or testing management from network data requires additional performance data, which is based on the need for prior maintenance of possible resources. Function: Perform historical information trends to predict future performance and provide pre-maintenance recommendations. Maintain a historical view of network performance information. Output: A historical perspective on network performance analysis. Output capacity and traffic analysis to the enterprise level (estimation and planning). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Binding-Binding-Φ 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 164 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention Notification of network performance degradation is given to network maintenance and recovery. Export NLA violations to service management. Export domain performance statistics to service performance reports. The collection of network data and / or network test management requires additional performance data, which is based on the need for prior maintenance of possible resources. Confirming network capacity changes requires network planning. Network Test Management Subroutine Figure 48 shows the network test management subroutine. This subroutine is responsible for verifying the operational usability of individual or connected network components, which can support a service and determine the cause of errors. He comprehensively manages test procedures to determine the appropriate tests to be performed, which controls tests and checks and compares results against predetermined limits and specifications based on path and equipment characteristics. It provides tracking and auditing of all actions. Input: Receive commands for network configuration and routing on pre-service (pre 丨 11-361 ^ 丨 (^) components, and network problem resolution for in-service components. Receive network Performance monitoring and analysis for performance problems, network problems for network errors during network problem solving, and routing management test request commands for scheduling management. Receive network and component configuration details. Receive test results from component management systems. From The test requester receives the circuit ID information. Function: 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 165 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --- ------ Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 B7 V. Description of the invention Maintain the appropriate test group and expected test results. Maintain a database of test resources. Confirm the clarity of the test to be tested Components that manage different tests for different devices and paths. Confirm that the tests are destructive (for existing traffic) and send appropriate warnings. Perform scheduled routine tests as needed Compare test results with expected results and designate them as pass / failure / uncertain. Maintain recorded output of tests and results: Request configuration details from a suitable network database. Require component management system to perform tests. "Report to schedule management and report" mistakes "to network problems. Export results of components in advance to network configuration and routing. Output results of components in service to network problem analysis and resolution or to network Performance and monitoring. Network configuration and routing subroutine Figure 49 shows the network configuration and routing subroutine. This subroutine installs the initial logical configuration of the network after the network is constructed. Furthermore, this procedure is in Design and installation network reconfiguration in operational network. During the design process, the corporate rules for network use were applied. In the design, reconfiguration requirements from different sources (high-level procedures and subroutines) were reconciled. . This subroutine is also negative

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------ Printed by the Consumers 'Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description Consistency of actual network configuration. Enter the initial configuration design for the newly constructed network from the network capacity / backbone planning process. Requirements from service configuration procedures for retention and configuration of standard network capacity. Reconfiguration requirements: From the network capacity / backbone planning subroutine, when network integrity may be compromised by third-party activities. From the service configuration program, when service requests cannot be implemented from available network inventory. In this case, the network configuration and routing subroutine will check whether the capacity can be obtained by reconfiguration. From the problem analysis and resolution subroutine, when a structural network problem can be solved by network reconfiguration. From the logistic management subroutine, when the network construction requires network reconfiguration, the operation of the network is critical because of the construction behavior. From the network capacity / backbone planning subroutine, when reconfiguration is necessary to connect the new network to the existing network Function Reserve and configure standard network capacity. Responsible for network reconfiguration. Install the initial network configuration and subsequent network reconfigurations. Generate work orders when actual action is necessary for network reconfiguration. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 167 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- Installation -------- Order-- ------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 -------- B7__ V. Description of the invention (\ U) Keep the actual network configuration and store it on the network The network configuration information in the road management and management system is synchronized. Maintain routing and connection tables. Apply corporate rules to internet use. Reconcile reconfiguration requirements. Output Notifies the service configuration program about the installed standard capacity. Notify other processes about reconfigurations on hold: Give initial requesters of reconfiguration to affected processes, such as network performance monitoring and analysis, network traffic monitoring and analysis, network alerts and events correlation, network Data collection and enhancement, and network capacity / backbone planning subroutines. Work order information to workforce management procedures. In summary, the coupling network discussed above can be implemented in the manner shown in Figure 50. According to the forecasted demand for the development of the integrated network, the order of the network capacity is sent in step 5,000. Refer to Figure 26. In step 5002, the coupled network is analyzed to confirm a network problem. Refer to Figure 32. Then, in step 5004, a combined network is provided according to the network problem and service request, which is proposed as shown in FIG. Based on the usage determined in step 5006, the usage of the coupled network is determined and the network usage control function is activated. Refer to Figure 34. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the portion of the coupling network that is supplied is assigned an identification code. Coupled network hardware can be implemented by running optional installation of coupled network hardware, & _ {_ 倂

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) _ 装 ---- Order ---- ----- Line | Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 1226164 ____B7 _ V. Description of the Invention (\ 4) The tasks in the task group such as network hardware are managed. Furthermore, historical data on network problems can be maintained, such as in a log file. If the usage rate exceeds a predetermined amount, a notification of the use of the integrated network can be provided. Subroutines can be used selectively. These subroutines include network capacity / backbone planning, software and data construction management, scheduling management, logistics management, labor management, security management, problem analysis and resolution, network performance monitoring and analysis, network traffic monitoring and analysis, network Route configuration and routing, network test management, network alert and event correlation, and network usage data collection and enhancement. Network Prototypes Prototype Networks A prototype of an NGN network can be created as a selling tool for network services. The prototype network can only include a part of the above network features. The prototype should be a multi-feature service delivery platform that can be used in both communication and non-communication industries. Therefore, the cross-industry of this solution must be emphasized. Applicability. For non-communications customers, this platform shows how they can effectively use communication services to their advantage. For communication industry service providers, this simulator shows what technical capabilities are required in the network, what communication enterprise capabilities it can achieve, and what new services the communication companies want to provide them. client. The goals of the prototype network The goals of the prototype are two-fold: To build sales capacity for network conversion (with 0C0) market supply 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 169 This paper standard applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Mm) ----------- install -------- order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (K) 〇) This can be shown to customers in the communications industry and other industries in various locations around the world The plan is completed. Prototype network is a tool to show how companies can make full use of new networks, and to show why communication providers need to provide these new network and system services, and how to provide them. Developed resources can include corporate solutions, white papers, technology assessments, and price recommendations for customers in communications and other industries. Establish transmission capabilities for network conversion (with 0C0) market supply. This can be achieved by actually building prototype versions of the following: (1) next-generation broadband smart network infrastructure that connects various locations (such as Palo Alto with Northbrook or Chicago); (2) integrates the new NMS , OSS and other communication software systems; and (3) integration of e-commerce applications and services, which can fully use and demonstrate the benefits of the new communication infrastructure. These assets for prototype network development can include methodologies, solution construction toolsets, work plans, budgets, and several technical resources, all of which are ready for customers to book. The needs of customers in the communications industry can be explained by the following: What are the characteristics that must be possessed by the new-type broadband intelligent IP-based networks in order to be able to efficiently deliver new services that can generate profits. What is the new network management and operations support system needed to effectively implement these services.

What is the new value-added service for telecommunication customers that can be beneficially provided to their business and consumer customers to generate additional profits and reduce it to 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper standard is applicable to National Standards (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install -------- order --------- line (please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling in This page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (Ο!) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This. These services revolve around the supply of e-commerce developed by CST. The NT Farm Supply Team may choose to integrate one or more of these electronic business services to be able to demonstrate NGN capabilities. The current recommendation integration is provided with eCRM because it has both business-to-business and business-to-customer capabilities, has a large number of call centers and CRM capabilities, and has a great correlation with the 0C0 market supply. eCRM-Personal homepages, portals, and price-oriented networks (such as My Site!) that interact with back-end customer relationship management (CRM) systems to showcase broadband customer lifestyles. Price Chain Integration-Demonstrates how cross-enterprise interactions can be changed by the wide availability of broadband, such as purchasing not only using catalogs, but also multimedia information and consulting, cross-enterprise design groups, dynamic configuration, deployment, monitoring, Management and analysis of the entire price chain. Enterprise Conversion-Analysis and simulation of corporate data for each desktop computer. Network Awakening Enterprise Application. Voice-activated access to enterprise information systems, anywhere, anytime. Next-generation ERP (XRP) 〇 Workgroup transformation-collaboration, virtual team environment, telex communication. Labor Conversion and Human Effectiveness-Multimedia Enterprise Simulation and Training. Remote studio capacity. Remote expert. Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, consumer cooperatives and innovative plans, such as: Active Knowledge Management-Personal Information Management Agent, which delivers customized news, jobs, meetings, opponents and customer information, etc. to corporate travelers at anytime and anywhere 0 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 171 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Β7_ 5. Description of the invention BargainFinder)-A customer shopping agent who actively asks for product offerings and compares prices anytime, anywhere. Community Paging-Integrated community services, such as government, health care, education, etc., are provided through a broadband community network. (Potentially, this integrates the next-generation market that the corporate network is planning to integrate with cities such as Palo Alto or San Francisco.) When building a prototype network, many issues were addressed, including: How to effectively build a new network . How to effectively build a management and support system for the new network. How to effectively construct additional price services while fully utilizing the new network prototype should be able to show the three components mentioned above to customers in communication and other industries: modern networks, modern network operation / management systems, and modern network services. The architecture that takes advantage of these opportunities is based on: Extending the network transformation architecture route and the detailed design documentation / solution building toolset that the prototype network can spread. Several detailed design documents for the creation of several e-commerce architectures, such as Enterprise Management Internet Architecture (EMIA), Microsoft e-commerce chemistry / public enterprise, financial services shared e-commerce infrastructure, etc. Prototype description The prototype environment should contain three layers that show how the future communication service provider will operate. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 172 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation -------- Order— (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 4 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention (p3) The new IP-type convergence network prototype Broadband network can be based on IP capabilities Built with voice, data and video. For example, initially, a sample prototype network will be deployed at the CST in Palo Alto, with wide-area links to Northbrook or Chicago. This network can be used to demonstrate the management and operation capabilities of service providers, business-to-business cooperation, and e-commerce prospects. In addition, customer broadband access environments can also be deployed in Palo Alto using cables and DSL modems. This can show the business-to-customer vision of e-commerce. The following products are available:

Cisco 7500 Wide Area Router

Cisco AS5300 with VoIP Card

Cisco Selsius / Summa Quad Integrated Router and PBX.

NetSpeed line for Cisco DSL access equipment Cisco cable modem WebTV, @Home services New network management system and operation support system The best integration of network management system and operation support system is ideal to demonstrate service delivery How will consumers operate their network and deliver enhanced services to customers in the future. The following products are available:

Cisco IOS Software Cisco / HP Network Management Products 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 173 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) | -------- Order --------- line Wei 1226164 Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperatives of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention (丨 outside)

Cisco Directory Actuation Network (DEN) SDK HP OpenCall (OpenCall Multiservice Controller),

Op enVi ew HP / UX Servers and Workstations HP Intel Basic Servers and Workstations

BellCore Operation Support System

Microsoft Directory Server, Authentication Server New eCommerce Services and Applications E-commerce scripts can be created to showcase service types, which can be activated by new networks and new operating systems. Prototypes can integrate and extend eCRM II prototypes with MySite! Customer Portal prototypes. A customer support script can be created that demonstrates multimedia and shared browsing interactions between customers with broadband access at home and service center call center agents. The following products are available:

Cisco PIX Firewall, LocalDirector HP VirtualVault HP Intel Basic Servers and Workstations

Microsoft web server, directory server, and other e-commerce services and applications. By building a prototype network, creating a fully convergent IP-based network display that handles all types of traffic and can dramatically address the issues facing organizations today. To reduce maintenance costs and expenses. The prototype network also demonstrates how organizations can provide better security for their networks and effectively use their existing bandwidth to dynamically allocate resources to more important functions. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 174 papers Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install --- 1 ---- order --------- line (please (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (Π5) Yes. Convergent Network also effectively provides an integrated multimedia event environment, which removes certain obstacles to today's e-commerce, such as slow download times, lack of user affinity, inability to find and inspect products (beyond the content in the catalog) (Can be given), undifferentiated service and access quality (fixed price, internet provider dialing signal busy line), etc. Prototype scope The purpose of network prototyping is to provide a platform that demonstrates the ability to transition from a circuit-switched environment to a packet-switched infrastructure. A broadband, wisdom, and convergence network may be the foundation's motivator and activist for change in all industries. The proposed model can be used as a demonstration to build a convergent broadband service solution and enterprise model, which (1) is highly attractive to the carrier operator customers; (2) is easy to adjust; and (3) is easy to replicate And can be exported to North America and the world market. The end result of this simulation is to show many fully integrated presentations, including all levels of the electronic economy. Hardware and software The following products can be used to create prototypes: Cisco 7500 router, Cisco AS5300 with VoIP card, Cisco Selsius / Summa four integrated routers and PBX, Cisco SC2200, and more.

The following products can be used to create prototypes: Cisco I0S Software, Cisco Directory Enabled Network, HP OpenCall, OpenCall Multi-Service Controller, OpenView, HP / UX Servers and Workstations, Shell 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation -------- Order --------- Line * (Please Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 ______B7__15. Invention Description α%) BellCore Operation Support System, Microsoft Directory Server, etc. . TDM multiplexers have been used well in the industry in the past (in the world of 9.6 to 64Kbit / s), but they do not meet today's needs (in the LAN or ATM world). TDM multiplexers have now reached the end of their lifetime. Routers handle multi-protocol routing well, such as IP and IPX. Although routers can provide some delay control through different queues, the smallest relay changes in the frame-based architecture cannot be controlled. In addition, bandwidth reservation in a router network is soft, because after a certain period of time, it cannot provide a reliable guarantee in a * connectionless environment, which is exacerbated by the lack of cos-sensing routing. In addition, routers lack interfaces and application flexibility, and cos support is used as an enterprise network enhancement tool. Not surprisingly, either of the two ATM-style architectures is optimally designed to meet COS requirements. Broadband ATM switches are a suitable solution for enterprise network hardening tools, which can be applied to some customers who can provide these tools and have the driving force for desktop ATM. ATM enterprise network switches are specifically designed to meet the needs of corporate WANs. It provides traditional and LAN data, circuit and ATM traffic, and multimedia enhancements that integrate switching and routing to provide low-potential and high-performance networks. It provides extensive interface support to enhance built-in traffic across multiple delivery services and is based on open standards. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) _ Install ------ Order --------- Line ^ ir 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 176 This paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (m) NGN network simulator network architecture结构 机构。 Structure member. It is generally recommended to adopt a two-stage approach for the design and implementation of the network architecture: first, design and implement the network architecture based on a simple connection scheme; second, update the network to a "provider-level edge network (carrier grade edge network), solution. A simple connection solution can include Cisco high-end point customer routers, which cross-connect the core ATM network derived from cables and wireless. The supplier-level edge network follows the cable and wireless ATM core. Join the edge network of CISCO IP + ATM WAN switch to replicate the typical Carrier Point of Presence (POP) function. This two-phase method can be selected for the following reasons: Start the demonstration of all-round capabilities and simple connection The solution allows the demonstration of basic capabilities. In order to demonstrate capabilities to potential supplier customers, the replication of the available resource constraints of unique features that may exist in the supplier / new core network must be performed. These can be provided by the supplier-level edge Network solutions are more fully enabled. Risk minimization is the main building block of supplier-level edge network solutions The technical support of supplier-level equipment is limited to the supplier. Such detailed network design entrusts the strong participation of rare supplier-level equipment experts in CISCO. Supplier-level 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 177 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order --------- line · (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨? Δ) The complexity of the detailed design of the option is generally more complicated, so it is compared with the simple connection option There are higher risks below. Detailed design and implementation in a two-stage approach allows suitable resources to be mobilized at both ends of the real-time category. Components of the NGN prototype example The NGN prototype example demonstrates multiple technologies, each of which is generally composed of Deployed by different respondent organizations, such as cables, ISPs, and LECs. This approach will demonstrate the ability to implement various network architectures as defined by the network switching market supply delivery. The prototype can simulate a cable with xDSL storage take Broadband smart supplier-level network of loop technology. The xDSL access infrastructure will connect Palo Alto's location to the NGN backbone and potential NGN alliance partner equipment. The cable data modem infrastructure can connect the Cisco Technology Lab to NGN Backbone, and show various network control applications that rely on broadband access technology. The components listed below constitute systems and applications that mainly provide partners / suppliers, which can be integrated to form the NGN supplier infrastructure basis.

Aspect: WebAgent, CallServer

Cisco 5x00, 7xxx routers, firewalls, regional directory Com21Cable modems, QAM / QPSK ATM switches Netspeed: DSLAM, DSL modems BigSky: ^ Hefei Information Server

Microsoft: NetMeeting, SiteServer, OpenSite, FreeMarkets HP: Smart Internet Use, Web QoS, OpenCall SS7,

Openview

VeriSign

Arib a Netscape Commercial Server Cybercash

CheckFree, MSFDC

Broadvision

SAP

PeopleSoft JD Edwards: One World 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 178 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- pack ----- --- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (丨 1) Development or Creation Components The following components can be developed to Standards that enhance shelf storage products (listed above) can be integrated to provide the network intelligence of broadband IP networks. NGN-SCE: Development and testing environment for smart service control applications. Smart call routing: Mixed media network path builder NGN chat manager: dynamic bandwidth allocation NGN allocation policy server: service startup, supply and secure dissemination NGN event recorder: smart OSS and BSS actuator network control Application: According to DYNAMIC, the lowest cost routing is performed according to the smart switch between the circuit and the IP infrastructure. Figures 51 to 57 illustrate examples of NGN prototype configurations. The capabilities of providers and service providers began with the role of call center staff changing from support to sales of specific services and then to collaborative design. NGN prototypes can enable the following capabilities, such as e-payment integration Multimedia interaction, electronic sales (e-selling, consulting sales) and electronic support (e-support) to traditional customers and new network service users, such as trade alliances to form an industrial extranet to deliver cross-enterprise communication. End-users can be provided with self-service tools, through web applications, which allow service features to be selected, place orders (pricing), and then activated without the need for traditional customer service operators and service technicians. NGN OSS: Launch is a proposed command and control application that provides the back-end functionality necessary to implement and fulfill the requirements initiated by the end-users of the aforementioned web control applications. Furthermore, this application can actuate a supplier to provide and launch new services, which are optimized and optimized for the next generation supply 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 179 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) π Pack ---- Order --------- Line | Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 1226164 Wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by A7, B7, Consumer Cooperatives of the Property Bureau. V. Invention Description (β〇) The intuition and high-yield mode of the enterprise program alliance, bridge the circuit and packet section of NGN. In addition, the 'prototype' can demonstrate supplier support functionality, such as the ability to place orders online or offline and then verify credit within minutes, and confirm service order configuration, supply, testing with a minimum number of operators involved in this process And start the service. Capabilities to Suppliers Smart OSS supply capabilities can greatly improve efficiency and supplier productivity, because in the traditional time category from order items to service start-up is 21 to 60 days, it depends on the complexity of the service. With the new ngN system capabilities, the time interval can be reduced by 21 to 60 days. OSS reply 'instant reply and self-healing capabilities can provide providers with a unique advantage, because unlike traditional procedures, which instinctively react, new capabilities determine service degradation caused by device or entity transmission errors through prediction errors and performance analysis ; After doing so, the OSS-Restoration application reconfigures the network to ensure that pending errors do not affect endpoint user services that rely on the failed resource. More details on OSS-Response Networking capabilities are described below. Electronic surcharge capabilities provide providers with a tool to collect and process the costs of services provided to end users. The difference provided by this application is mainly the accounting department 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. In addition, this capability provides suppliers with a reduced operating cost infrastructure, which is competitively superior 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 180 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm)- ----------- Install -------- Order --------- Line Win (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΗPrinted by a consumer cooperative 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (θ \) OSS-response ability perceived by the end user to provide the service to the end user without interruption 'The availability of the service can be obtained at will (this is good news ). CNM capabilities can provide end-users with a first-of-its-kind view of a network, which delivers services by alerting them to alerts, performance and difficult information about the services they use. Such ability enhances the customer's confidence in the supplier 'and provides the supplier as a pre-customer service oriented organization. Electronic surcharges and electronic support capabilities provide end-users with a convenient method of customer service and surcharges, which is in line with today's 24/7 life cycle. This empowers endpoint users to control their services and stimulate the growth of network resource usage. OSS-Response: Predictive Mistake Management Figure 58 shows a method 5800 for predictive mismanagement on the Internet. The performance of the network is monitored in step 5 802. In step 5804, any degradation of network performance is confirmed. Based on the confirmed degradation of network performance, future network performance is predicted in steps 5 8 06. In step 5808, the predicted future performance is compared to perform the service level agreement requirements of a plurality of network users to identify any future problems in meeting the performance requirements. The network is reconfigured in steps 58 to 10 to avoid problems with performance requirements. The following describes an exemplary network management system for a network, which is used to monitor and reconfigure the network to avoid future problems. Degraded network performance can be caused by, for example, equipment errors and / or physical transmission errors and network errors. Preferably, step 5810 (regroup 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 181) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ install — (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 1 ^^ ____B7_ V. Description of the Invention ) State network) is implemented in real time. Even better, steps 5 8 02 to 58 10 are continuously repeated in real time. A network management system can be used to monitor and reconfigure the network to avoid expected problems during any or more errors, tests, and performance management. When providing and operating a communications network, it is important to provide monitoring and control functionality to support a variety of network management projects, including performance and configuration, and error management. Recently, not only the network itself is managed, but the services provided by the network must also be managed. Various network management systems are known and published. For example, JeanWalrand discussed network management in "Communications Networks: A First Course" published by Richard D Irwin Inc and Aksen Associates Inc in the United States in 2001. Another related publication is `` Telecommunications Network Management into the 21st Century ", edited by Salah Aidarous and Thomas Pievyak, and edited by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) in 1994 Co-issued. In general, a network management system must have an interface with the network it manages so that it can monitor or test a variety of different items, such as the current configuration and traffic conditions, and whether they are performing satisfactorily; that is, meeting any Performance criteria used. Preferably, the system should be able to detect the standard 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 182. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) ---------- --Install -------- Order ---- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 4 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164, Invention Description (\ 〇shows effectiveness Degraded indicators, so that errors can be predicted and actions taken in advance. Another purpose of the interface is to output from the network management system to the network, so that it can modify or control all aspects of the network. Inevitably throughout history The emphasis is on monitoring and controlling the hardware of the network itself, such as switches and multiplexers that carry traffic. The services provided by the network are relatively simple. However, with the increase in services and network hardware, communications In recent developments, the network management system must include the functionality of installation, monitoring, and control services, along with supporting technologies such as billing and charging. In some cases, the service management analysis system is considered to be connected to the network. Road management system In other cases, it is regarded as different functions of the same device development. The steps taken are consistent and flexible, so that network operators or service providers can quickly Respond to the customer interface and to the problems and needs caused by competitor activities, and preferably any strategy adopted can be adapted to the new network and new services. The management system of the network needs to have an interface with the network itself, for example in order to It is necessary to be able to intercept information and output control information, and then have the view of the network based on which it can process this information. Complex communication networks, the services they provide, and related management systems have different levels or domains for management purposes. The method is described. Such a level or domain starts with the network device itself, such as the network layer that is subsequently monitored and controlled by the network management layer NML. For the services provided by the network, there may be separation Service management SML.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 183 ------------------------- Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (丨 gif) View from a hierarchical perspective 'This type of network management system has been published by the applicant, which is called Co-operative Network Architecture for Management (CNA-M). Documents about CNA-M are available from the CAN Secretariat of Telecommunications pic, UK. It is located at St. Vincent House, Ipswich, Suffolk IP1 iux (UK). It defines a structured architecture that contains enterprise processes and management systems needed to provide services on the network. The two main levels of this architecture are service management layer SML and network management layer NML. SML provides cooperation on all activities for the management of the services provided on the relevant network. NML provides procedures whereby the network itself can be planned and operated. Clearly, activities at a particular level in a network management system affect other levels. For example, a switch error is directly related to the network layer, but it will affect the services performed on that switch ’and even SML. Therefore, for a network management system, it is important to have a close interaction between the levels (or domains) of this type of network management system, and the embodiments of the present invention are designed to make this close and effective S-actions can be activated at the level or domain of the service and network management system. According to a first aspect of the network management system of the present invention, it provides a management system of a communication network for monitoring and controlling service provision through the network, wherein the management system includes information about the network and / or provided by it Touch signal input of service information; data processing devices that respond to triggering signal access and processing of information; and output and control signals that control and / or report on the network and / or service. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 184 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --------- Line (please first Read the notes on the back and fill out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ _____ B7 ___i, Description of Invention 0g5) Preferably, the management system is provided with a data structure including array characterization data. The group confirms and describes a manageable communication network level, management rule files related to the characterization data of the selected group, each management rule file contains management rules about the characteristics described by the related characterization data group, and Relevant data sets that associate one or more management rule files with one or more selected characterization data sets. The data processing device is used to respond to the trigger signal by confirming a set of characterization data and accessing one of the management rule data confirmed by the related data set regarding the set of characterization data; and if the file or the related data is Group or other data structure, access at least one further related data group and one of the management rule files confirmed by the further related data group, so that the management system can actuate to respond to the trigger signal appropriately. Conveniently, related data sets can be arranged into a hierarchical structure. This can use a “supported” relationship between related data sets, which reflects a hierarchical model of the network. The trigger signal can be caused by an error in the hardware components of the network. In this case, the management system needs to be able to analyze the causal relationship of the error and decide whether to take management action. The management action can be just a report to the customer, or it can involve, for example, traffic routing. Triggers may also occur due to degraded network or service performance. In this case, the management actions of the system can be designed to allow corrective or preventive actions to be taken. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 185 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). 1226164 A7

V. Description of the invention The printing of clothing by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In addition, the trigger signal may also be generated by a customer or service provider requesting to perform tests related to the Internet or services. The management system must be able to determine the nature of the tests to be performed and report results. Embodiments of the present invention allow problems and mistakes related to the network and the manner in which their effects are disseminated to be detected and controlled regardless of any inherent interfaces that may exist in the architecture or functionality of the management system. Because the embodiment can also enable network and service testing, it can provide a full range of errors, testing, and performance management. The profile data sets can confirm network capabilities, such as capacity, or can identify services or service support characteristics. The principle of the management system according to the embodiment of the present invention is that the data structure can effectively decompose the services from the network providing the data. This can be quite important, for example, one or more service providers can provide services across the network of one or more independent network operators. The management system according to the embodiment of the present invention can be designed to work with the telex communication network of the past, with the software built in the switch, or with the intelligent network architecture currently developed, or a similar architecture, etc. Use, where network intelligence is provided far from the switch and adds a lot of complexity, while the services available are also increasing. (Although many references are provided in the description of network management systems, for practical purposes, these systems also provide service management functions.)

In the description of the first aspect of the present invention, the above management rule file can hold data related to network restrictions, such as capacity, or can hold data related to service restrictions, such as customers and service providers and / or the network. Conditional conditions set out in service level agreements between operators. At least one 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 5. For the description of invention (πο), it provides this Embodiments of the invention span the management capabilities of the inherent interface of the management system, such as between the fields of service management and network management. The service level agreement is usually between the network or service provider and the user or customer of the network, and proposes the service or service selected by the user or customer, together with the conditions agreed by the service provider. The embodiment of the first aspect of the network management system of the present invention may be structured according to a hierarchical model of a managed network. The management system includes a trigger signal input on the network and / or services provided by the management system; Data processing devices that access and process information; and output of signals sent over the network and / or the service. The data processing device includes a hierarchical data structure with characteristic agreement data storage, each of which is used to retrieve data defining specific requirements at the level of the network model to support a set of operation-related conditions, such as a service level agreement or similar Things and more. The trigger signal may be, for example, a fault or performance report, which indicates that the network element is malfunctioning. Management systems can respond by accessing data structures at a level corresponding to the network management layer of the network model, and using accessible data at that level to determine which network characteristics are affected and affected by them degree. The data can also indicate whether data structures on the second level need to be accessed. If no features are affected, or the characteristics are only affected to a small extent, the management system can trigger network diagnostics and repairs without having to generate a report to the customer. In addition, a fault report can indicate that features provided by one or more networks have been severely affected, and as a result, service to customers has been affected, and must be reported to customers. The management system may need to access one of the hierarchy in this example.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order --- ------ Line ml · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (丨 δ?) Series-level data structure, It is necessary not only to diagnose and repair the network, but also to send causal reports such as fault reports to customers. As far as the interface between different levels of the network is concerned, it is quite difficult to control the management functions of the network. An embodiment of the present invention can provide a framework for an interface between different levels, for example, between a service and a network management layer, and provide a relationship between the network and the service based on a feature protocol-based data structure. . Embodiments of the present invention allow error detection and management, which is not only a retrospective, but also a prediction, such as capturing error propagation to different levels. This latter perspective allows for potential error prevention and treatment. The above emphasis relies on error management and refers to triggering signals for error reports on network elements. However, embodiments of the present invention can be used to manage other aspects of the network, such as test management or performance report propagation. If the customer requests information that requires testing of certain aspects of service, features, or network components, the trigger signal may include a test request. Here the management system may access a level of data structure corresponding to the service management layer of the network model as the first step in determining what tests are needed and whether services, features and / or network components need to be tested. Depending on the data accessed at that level of the data structure, the management system may then need to access the level corresponding to the network management layer of the network model. In this script, the signal sent by the management system can be a test signal, which is used to generate the test of the actual network components, and the subsequent test report to pass the results to the customer. If the network condition occurs when the performance of the network component is degraded, a trigger signal may be generated, which will match the characteristics and suit the network level or service. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 188 This paper standard is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) clothing -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 ----- --- Β7 ___ V. Description of the invention 〇 & qi) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Characteristic agreement data of the management system is stored for comparison to determine whether the performance report should be transmitted to a higher management level . This procedure can be applied iteratively at each successive level, and a performance report can be generated in real time or a statistical report summarized in a certain period to the service customer. According to a second aspect of the network management system of the present invention, a method for managing a communication network is provided. The network management system combines a hierarchical data structure, a hierarchical level corresponding to a network model level, and a network on an individual level. A data structure that contains or has data access rights that define features that specify functional requirements, by: receiving a trigger signal containing information about the network and / or service provided; by accessing data at the first level in the hierarchy The structure should trigger signals; use the first-level data to process the received information; and respond to the result to access the second-level data structure indicated by the result. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Conditions in response to triggers to determine network management results. Please see the network model with the network management layer under the service management layer. If the management system receives the error report of a network component as a trigger, it will generally start with a level equivalent to the data structure of the network management layer. Apply a set of conditions and rely on the result, then apply array conditions from anywhere in the data structure. The set of relevant conditions in each case is determined by the feature agreement data storage built into the data structure. If the management system receives a test request from a customer as a trigger, it will generally first use a level from the data structure equivalent to the service management layer.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW The paper & degree is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297 public love) A7 1226164 B7_____ 5. The invention explains the group conditions, and then crosses the SML / NML interface effectively in other directions Mobile to apply a set of conditions from a level equivalent to network management. Business Simulator (Business Simulator) A business simulator can be a tool used to demonstrate the transition from a company's current enterprise architecture to the enterprise architecture necessary to support the company's next-generation and new core network environment. The enterprise simulator is a component of the network conversion market supply, which provides a demonstration and testing environment for companies to experience first-hand network conversion knowledge capital and assets. The purpose of the Enterprise Simulator is to demonstrate the ability of the network conversion market to supply and assist suppliers to change more successful assets. Enterprise simulators describe the transformation of the operating infrastructure of typical core network providers to the use of next-generation network technologies, redefining organizational structures and enhancing human processes to deliver high-value, enterprise benefits such as new profits and dramatic operating cost reductions. Next Generation Network (NGN) Enterprise Simulator: NGN Enterprise Simulator provides a real-life view of future telex communication. For its part, simulators provide companies / users with the knowledge they need to learn before they are implemented in a safe, risk-free environment, rather than in a production environment. In addition to the rule of thumb, the simulator also provides a rule of why, which is a basic intellectual capital for companies / users to move into the new world of cyberspace. However, the learning experience is only one level of the NGN enterprise simulator. It is the building block for a new e-economic implementation that enables electronic customers and communications providers to create network-enabled services. It can be an integrated enterprise (strategy, process, technology, and people) approach to delivering the New World Network. This is because in the physical network 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 190 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- Order ------- -(Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Printed by the Employee Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _____ Β7 ____ V. Description of Invention () W) Type Analog technology alone cannot provide an increase in price to customers. To simply illustrate the impact of e-commerce products and services, there must be a holistic approach. Customers will want to know the downstream response to the transition to NGN. What should be the process for providing new Internet services? What support systems are necessary to ensure service quality? What organizational infrastructure is needed? These important questions and many others will be answered by the NGN Enterprise Simulator and many services that can be integrated into the Enterprise Simulator. Refer to Figure 59, which illustrates some example services that can be integrated into an enterprise simulator. The architecture of the NGN Enterprise Simulator is shown in Figure 60. The components of the NGN Enterprise Simulator support and integrate four strategic platforms: excellent procedures, actuation technology, excellent strategies, and the maximization of the enterprise by optimizing human efficiency in proportion. Efficiency is important. Therefore, the enterprise integration method is the center of the NGN enterprise simulator architecture, and each enterprise capability will be defined as the function of people, procedures and technologiesb. By converting assets across the entire network and assets from other markets as shown in Figure 61, the NGN Enterprise Simulator can leverage the entire enterprise integration framework. Strategy The strategy components for implementing the NGN Enterprise Simulator should focus on the following network conversion market supply assets: ~ Conversion methods Enterprise diagnosis research Enterprise architecture blueprints version 1.0 and 2.0

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW ------------ Installation -------- Order ---------. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) 191 1226164 B7 V. Description of the invention (MNS / NM deliverables of the illusion network creation program model (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Other market supply assets, such as end-to-end, best To define and implement an NGN business simulator program, you can use an operations map. Figure 62 shows an example of an operation map. This special operation map describes and defines 15 service and network management programs. It can be found in most communication service provider networks. This model is a widely accepted industry standard. The use of telex communication operation maps will help to: Ensure an industry standard process model with other users / providers Interoperability of the above operations; and accelerate the first public release of the NGN simulator by linking to well-known program definitions and descriptions. Technical implementation The technical components of the NGN enterprise simulator focus on two areas: network architecture services and network Road management system The personnel component of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Personnel and Economics, printed by the Consumer Cooperative, and implemented the human component of the NGN Enterprise Simulator, plays an important role in answering the following customer questions: How do hundreds of engineers train and deploy to convert and migrate networks from circuit switching To packet exchange? What new technology is needed to develop a packet exchange environment? 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 192 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 ____B7__ V. Description of the invention (M3 ) How is the next-generation network NOC organized? How should the customer maintenance center staff train and introduce their new roles? NGN Enterprise Simulator Enterprise Capabilities New World "Use" Network Operation Support Services Network Support Services Enterprise Support Services Enterprise Management Services E-commerce services New World "Use" Network "Use" is under the supporting infrastructure, which provides intelligent connection between various NGN components. They can include back-haul circuit facilities ), Broadband switching infrastructure, access devices, routers, End devices, etc. Refer to Figure 63, which shows an example of a use network. In this capability, procedures will also be defined as network creation, as shown in Figure 64. These procedures will allow customers to build NGNs Network capabilities enable NGN products and services, such as e-commerce applications, to be supported in terms of capacity, availability, and service quality. The following example locations of NGN enterprise simulators are based on telework and smart stores (e-commerce ) Etc. The proximity of the solution center is selected. Therefore, every location, such as Palo Alto (e-commerce), Minneapolis (telecommunications work), Sophia Antipolis (ACTP), Northbrook (not 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 193 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 4 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order -------- -Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 1226164 ___B7____ V. Description of invention (from outside), Windsor (Smart Store 1 future version), Dallas (INFORMART-future version), Manila (Telecommunications Work-Future) Version), with the strategic importance of its ability to be provided to the entire NGN enterprise simulator. In addition, purpose-built networks can have additional capabilities for interoperability. Operational Support System (OSS) The Operational Support System provides the required infrastructure, which accepts customer service orders, tracks the progress of orders, and notifies customers when orders are completed. The system can also provide installation and configuration information to specific customers, including customer installation and configuration of preset equipment. Please refer to Figure 65. In addition, the OSS system can be responsible for receiving service complaints from customers, resolving complaints to satisfy customers, and provide repair status or response actions. It also includes monitoring, management, and service quality reports as defined in service descriptions and SLAs. Actions can include immediate reconfiguration or monitoring of service quality based on service levels to be able to determine whether service levels are being achieved consistently. Finally, the OSS system can ensure that the quality of network operations is based on the required network performance goals. To support the OSS infrastructure, the following processes must be developed: Service and network provisioning Sales order processing Service configuration Service and network provisioning

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------ Installation -------- Order-- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description Service and Network Assurance Problem Handling Customer, QoS Management Service Quality Management Service Problem Solving Network Inventory Management Network Maintenance and Recovery Network Data Management Network Support Service The important role of services. However, in a packet environment, Network Support Services (NSS) fulfill the role of service creation environment. In the NGN Enterprise Simulator, this capability can include components from a policy server to a directory server. E-Commerce Applications The script favored by telecommunications companies that barely involve e-commerce businesses includes an environment in which the NGN environment is considered an important part of communication packaging, or e-commerce drives fixed communications between consumers and retailers. As a potential provider of these channels, communications companies continue to profit from the use of e-commerce in many industries. To deal with the dramatic changes that are coming, service providers must improve customer service, productivity (reduced costs), market capabilities, and market speed. For its part, the NGN Enterprise Simulator can explain how e-commerce applications are supported, not only from the perspective of network capabilities, but also from the perspective of operations and management. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 195 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) • ----------- installation -------- order i (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by B7 of the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention () < U) The use and advantages of the NGN Enterprise Simulator Method of Demonstrating Enterprise Capabilities in an E-Commerce Environment 6600. In step 6602, data connectivity is provided between a plurality of network sites located in different geographic locations. In step 6604, display materials are received from one of the sites. The presentations show the capabilities of the business at one or more sites. In step 6606, the display data is organized into a display format, such as by organizing the data in objects contained in an object container described later. In step 6608, the display data is transmitted to another site in the display format via the network. In the embodiment of the present invention, the display material is an enterprise simulation. In other embodiments, the display material includes a display of product / service capabilities provided by one of the sites. Display materials can be selectively received in real time, just as they were when they were generated. Example Internet protocol services that can be supported include at least one of streaming audio, streaming video, fax transmission and reception, and Internet telephony. Data connectivity should be provided between at least eight sites, as shown in Figure 71 (detailed below). Organization in the display format The organization of the display data in the display format is performed by the application development system, which allows users to create reusable " object containers by simply defining links in the example objects Using the technology called Hierarchical Encapsulation here, the system automatically isolates the external dependencies of the object container created by the user. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 196 This paper standard applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ install -------- order --------- line (please read the note on the back first ? Please fill in this page again.) Printed on the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 1226164 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the Invention (丨 ψ)) Objects contained in other objects are not hidden in their object container environment or tight Tightly connected to the object container environment. Instead, they are fairly loosely connected to those environments, so they can be reused more easily in other environments. With the advantage of being contained in another object, the package The contained object is automatically provided with the ability to access its environment. Basically, for the objects it contains, the object container is an environmental frame of reference ° unless it is revoked by the author, Otherwise objects automatically receive messages sent to their object containers. They can automatically access data known to their object containers. Their location is even determined relative to their object containers. Furthermore, objects are taken from their characteristics Decomposition. By defining two different object types (one of which modifies the other) and the two types of objects are loosely coupled (that is, temporarily linked), the system provides a mechanism for the author to modify the properties of an object. A feature that only considers one of the objects to be contained in another. The feature is removed by removing the object from its container. In this way, the author can easily modify the characteristics of an object and in other contexts Use it again.

In the embodiment described here, the system is optimized for the development of interactive multimedia applications or "titles." This multimedia authoring system provides a visual authoring interface that requires a small amount (if any) of scripts or programs to Its user (author). The system uses an object-based form of writing. The author directly creates and configures example objects, usually by dragging and dropping icons and forming dialog boxes. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

-Install --- I ---- order --------- line I 1226164 __ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed agricultural A7 B7 Invention Description (丨 M) The author can create two basic types Objects ·· Components and modifications. Symbols represent actual characteristics or roles that interact with another author's title. Components can generally be linked to external media (such as text, sound, pictures, animations, and movies) and have some inherent characteristics associated with that media. The author can assist the inherent characteristics of the component by incorporating modifiers into the components. These modifications provide the ability of the component to further define what the component is (called a variable) and the ability to further determine what the component does. A special type of modifier, called behavior, can contain additional behaviors and other modifiers to provide authors with a mechanism to create complex element “personality”. In this embodiment, both the component and the behavior are object containers, which can include (ie, be linked to) object templates of other object templates. Elements can include modifiers and other elements, and behaviors can include modifiers that include other behaviors. By combining components into components, authors can create the structural hierarchy of components, and each component provides an environmental "reference frame" for the components it contains. These "parent" components allow authors to provide structures as their titles and build model relationships between the components. Components can communicate with another component at a high component level, regardless of their child elements. At a certain level, components encapsulate their subcomponents by creating a modular interface, through which the subcomponents of an interface component can communicate with objects outside the component container.

In the same way, by combining behaviors (and other modifications) in behaviors and all located in a component, the author creates a behavioral hierarchy in the component. Also 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order --------- line 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (丨 (^)) That is, the "personality" inside the component. Within the content of the component personality, each behavior provides an environment "reference frame" to the modifications it contains. These "mother" behaviors allow the author to Simulate the relationship between the different behaviors of the component's overall personality. In fact, components inherit the characteristics provided by their internal behavioral hierarchy. Because components and modifications are different and loosely connected objects, authors can simply use Add modifiers (or remove modifiers) to modify a component's characteristics. By using the structure and behavior hierarchy, the system provides important reusability to the object container to The external dependency of components and behaviors. Basically, the system automatically encloses the author's object container. Once enclosed, they can be reused in other environments. Furthermore, by loosely enclosing the components Linked to the modifications it contains, the system allows authors to modify their components so that when maintaining a hierarchical bag that evolves face-to-face with the component's external environment, it can inherit and not inherit properties. Using a technique called adoptive, Authors can "adopt" an element through a new parent element. Using a similar technique called transplantation, the author can "transplant" the behavior (or the entire "personality") of one element to another. Because the hierarchy is encapsulated Integrated into the structure and behavior hierarchy determined by the author's object container, the author automatically benefits from this technology. Its components and behavior can therefore be selectively reused. For example, a mechanism called hierarchical message broadcasting provides a structured Information system, which broadcasts information from its original purpose down to the structure and behavior hierarchy. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P12 2.TW 199 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order ------ --- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 1226164 V. Description of the invention (^ > 0) to all sub-components and modifications. This mechanism isolates an object container as a seal It is intended to be an absolute target for all the messages of any object in the object container. This mechanism makes the reuse of the object container in other environments easy. In this environment, the new "parent" component of the object container will be Automatically provide information. Another mechanism, called hierarchical variable categories, makes variables automatically accessible to the parent components or behavioral child objects of all variables. This mechanism isolates the dependence of the object container on the variables outside the object container, but it is still in the "environment" he inherited. By making these variables the objects in the variable-dependent object container, the object container can be moved to another environment, which has a well-defined external interface and knows which external variables are assumed to exist in that environment. However, another mechanism called hierarchical relative position determines the position of a child component relative to its parent component. Therefore, the child component automatically moves with its parent component. This mechanism isolates the external location dependency of the component; that is, the effect of the component environment on the location of the component. In addition to the "built-in" components and modifications, the system has considerable extensibility through "components API. Component APIs allow programmers to seamlessly integrate new modifications (and services that support them) into the system. The system also Provide an intermediary application communication mechanism integrated with the hierarchical message broadcasting mechanism of the system. By providing network message modifiers and corresponding services, the author can mark a message to another plan / title (and in its own plan / title) ), And use the structure and behavioral hierarchy to spread the message to the child components and modifications. As in the internal plan / title 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 200 This paper standard applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -------------------- Order --------- line # (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) Printed by the Employees 'Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 1226164 A7 ^ ____ B7- ------ V. Description of Invention (M \) Provided by the new parent component, this The reusability of manufactured object containers is easy to implement in other environments. In addition to promoting selective reusability of object containers, this mechanism also provides an infrastructure for the object hierarchy of each individual plan / title. Calibration and dissemination of information. It is not restricted to "point-to-point, communication of information 'to intermediary application communication between objects. The system uses the same object hierarchy that each author constructs for internal application communication. In this way, a message can be assigned to an object container of another application without having to know which object in the object container will process the message. The structure and behavioral hierarchy of the target application determines how the message is handled. The author only needs to agree with the name and meaning of the message, without having to worry about the name or even the function of the object that ultimately processes the message. The system's intermediary applies a message mechanism that allows authors to send messages not only to another project / title, but also to materials attached to those messages. This data can range from simple integers, strings, and other common data types to fairly complex forms, composite objects, and even entire object containers that contain their structure and behavior hierarchy. In the latter example, these "telephone (te e e ρ ο r t e d)" object containers are not only informational, but must be demonstrated in the target plan / title. Just as elements in a plan / title can be dynamically "cloned" or "killed", and "passed" (or have their modifications "ported" to) another "parent" object Containers, and these "telephone" object containers must also be "copied" or demonstrated in the target project / title, and have been 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 201 This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- MW t -------- tr --------- φ (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this (Page) 1226164 A7

V. Description of the Invention α〇χ) The Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed or transplanted to their new target "mother, object container (such as the initial destination of the intermediary application message). 0bject Reference Variables), the author can specify the initial destination of the message as the relative or absolute point of the object in the structure and / or line layer (in the interaction plan / title). The author can mark a message to Any known object container (including top-level, plan, level) to balance their knowledge of structure and behavioral hierarchy in the target plan / title. By dynamically addressing this reference, the system provides considerable flexibility for authors when calibrating objects that may move in their own structure and behavioral hierarchy. "List variable" provides a convenient mechanism for authors' to mark multiple remote plans / titles among other things. This mechanism is quite useful in multi-user titles, where the number of users can be changed dynamically. The ability to specify forms or arrays of remote hosts allows authors to label a message to all hosts with a single network message modifier (as is usually required) without having to sacrifice the ability to calibrate one or more individual hosts when necessary. At the same time, the author can insert a title into a World Wide Web page by using a browser plug-in and "open URL modifier". With this mechanism, authors can provide the ability to interact with multiple titles to a user (content in a browser window). Any component can be dynamically linked to another headline (or open any page on the World Wide Web), just as easily as responding to running messages sent within or across any headline.

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 public love) 11--1 JAW — I-- 丨 丨 —Order—! -丨! (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 _______B7__ V. Invention Description (: L〇3 >) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Finally, the system architecture is roughly the same as the platform Nothing. The title can be used on multiple platforms. Furthermore, due to the isolation of platform-related layers in the system, only minor modifications are needed, and the entire authoring environment can become a re-export for various platforms. Script usage Depending on the capabilities in the NGN Enterprise Simulator, various scripts are defined to represent the NGN environment. Each script will be a mix of capabilities to identify the specific enterprise architecture gap between the customer's existing enterprise operating model and NGN. This approach ensures that the challenges accompanying enabling the underlying capabilities are significantly exacerbated. Furthermore, certain scripts can be customized to meet specific customer needs. In this regard, a planning conversation with a customer can be conducted to rehearse these capabilities at a solution center such as the Telegraph Center in Minneapolis. The whole idea is to explain to customers a practical conversion method that leads them to the New World Network. Sample Network Prototype Script (Customer Service Script) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Figure 67 shows how electronic business capabilities on the NGN prototype (or other) network can be demonstrated through simulation. In step 6700, a data connection on the network is provided between a simulated user, a simulated product distributor, a simulated product supplier, and a simulated financial service provider. In step 6702, the electronic catalog is displayed on the network. The electronic catalog displays products sold by analog product suppliers. In step 6704, an electronic catalog of the simulated user browsing the Internet is displayed. At step 6706 ', the online inquiry is displayed between the simulated user and the simulated distributor related to the product displayed for sale on the electronic catalog. Step 670 8 shows the simulated user

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 1226164 V. Description of invention The choice of product. In step 6710, the simulated user authorizes the payment after checking the user account online. For example, a simulated user can be described as reviewing a product bill 'which can be instantly received by the simulated user. Preferably, the Internet Protocol services supported on the network include at least one of streaming audio, streaming video, fax transmission and reception, and multipoint internet calling. It is also preferred that the consultation between the analog user and the analog product distributor is operated by streaming audio and video. Examples of prototype scripts of the mentioned methods can be interactive transactional Internet between My Site customer users, remote call center workers (deliverers) supporting web storefronts, product companies (suppliers), and financial services organizations Road business experience. Each simulated user, simulated product distributor, simulated product supplier, and simulated financial service provider can be selectively located at a unique site on the network. For example, if the user is at the Minneapolis site and the call center worker is at the PA Site of Roodo. By using IP-based data, audio, and full-motion video phone systems to provide time-insensitive and location-insensitive labor to manipulate web storefronts, workers in remote calls can emphasize network capabilities to take full advantage of the evolving network The 24-hour nature of the world. The product supplier can be an audio visual entertainment company that partners with a web commerce vendor to sell audio and video content delivered by NGN and presents it to customers through a web browser capable viewing program managed by the MySite application. .

MySite customers can actually browse or sample the content (IP audio and video streaming) before purchasing the content, and go to the shop on the button on the website 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 204 This paper standard applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --------- line ^ 一 ^ (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page for further information) Printed by the Employees 'Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ---—_ B7_____ V. Description of invention (10 $) Operator consultation (IP video conference) Decode the purchased content in cooperation with the subject matter experts on browser configuration (T.120 whiteboard (wllite-boarding) and application sharing), Q & A phone conversations with authors participating in content abroad (multi-point IP phone). Check the real-time bill for a transaction (the real-time bill provided across the IP-FAX to the joint message mailbox), and finally check the account online to authorize the surcharge (secure Internet banking) ° The financial service organization will demonstrate the network capabilities And third-party plus services provide # a secure and robust interface and support. Real-time accounting capabilities demonstrate the transition from OOS / BSS to next-generation network support systems. This model can also be used by other files to show the feasibility of industrial transformation 'and to help customers in these markets supply deliverables across industries and market units. Customer service script description The table below describes the above with a detailed basic level script. It describes the main components of the script and the NGN capabilities it shows (classified by technology).

My Site customer inquires store operator via website button < IP audio and video streaming 5 video conference

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 205

1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (X_〇b)

My Site customers work with subject matter experts on browser configuration to decode purchased content. T.120 Whiteboard Sharing with the application ------ B0004 Customers abroad and content authors join the phone Q / A conversation. Multipoint IP Phone Γ The customer reviews the instant bill for the transaction. Provided across a ip-fax to a joint message, the account was submitted at the time of good P. B 0 0 0 6 After checking the online account, the customer authorized the payment. Safe Internet Banking Example of Network Prototype Script (Service Provider Operation Script)

Figure 68 illustrates a method 6800 for simulating the operation of a service provider network. In step 6802, a prototype broadband network is provided; that is, the NGN network described above. This network can communicate voice, data and video information. The capabilities of the service provider, business-to-business collaboration script and e-commerce script are shown on the prototype broadband network in step 6804. The capabilities of the prototype broadband network are shown in steps 6 8 06. These capabilities are selected from a capability group, including: allowing connection to a real operator; capturing and organizing information about the caller for display; allowing data transfer during voice communication between callers; and receiving voice and Enter and store the same information in the mailbox using the keyboard. Preferably, the information about the caller includes one of available information for a reply call, contact information, and an emergency call. Optional further operations include displaying business-to-customer e-commerce scripts. Another optional further operation includes showing the caller at 206

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 V. Description of the invention (10,) The ability to refer to internal and external resources during a call, and further extract Information accessible to one of the callers. As part of the simulation, browsing interactions can be displayed between service providers and customers who access the prototype broadband network from home. One of the prototype broadband networks that can be selectively displayed is to receive voice and keyboard input, store the input in a mailbox, replay a predetermined length of voice input, and convert a predetermined amount of keyboard input into Sound is used for replay purposes. The following sections provide a more detailed description of some of the capabilities of prototype broadband networks. Functionality enabled by developed and integrated components The following script describes the applications and functionality enabled by the Smart Broadband Generation Network shown by the telex provider of the Enterprise Simulator. Caller ID information: This is an example of an ongoing short voice / voice message transmission, or a video call or a multimedia collaborative conference. It is hot-linked to detailed information about the text that will impact the decision-making market process. Information. Smart followers: Ability to call web-based followers to dispatch work, such as using voice, fax, email, and video content to deliver messages, set up meetings, assign on-demand form content packaging, and respond to "on-site" calls from a joint mailbox (at 0CTEL Live version of option # 8). Snapper: Capture and organize detailed information about the caller in addition to the time of the call and the caller ID; for example: information that can answer the call when available (if your message is urgent, where can you be found within an hour ), Contact number (voice, video, multimedia, IP address, etc., or if it is not urgent, you can find your best time and address). 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 207 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) quot " (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ------- -The line is printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (1 Kun) Data vector: Allows the caller to refer to internal or external sources of information. The callee needs to review the call before calling back. Or discuss during the call and retrieve what the callee can access. Detailed notification: For example, instead of calling to ask the callee to check the mailbox, you should call or call to inform you that 7 messages have been received and 3 emergency messages from Andrew Hughes, Joe Ford, and Bruce Backett; short message message (can be replayed in the first ten seconds of an emergency message or converted from voice to text or text-to-sound; it is based on the notification mechanism, that is, from PDA, from voice To text, if it is a phone or audio-aware device, convert the sound to text and replay it on the device. Web control application: The application enables the supplier to authorize the end Users take control of services across services via an open but secure Internet, thereby freeing up supplier responsibility and the cost burden of ordinary, non-profit work, while simultaneously improving productivity and customer satisfaction. Supplier and service provider capabilities The role of the printed call center staff in the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has changed from support to sales of professional services to co-design. NGN prototypes give these capabilities, such as electronic premium integrated multimedia interaction, electronic sales (consulting sales) Electronic support for both traditional customers and the new blood of network service users, such as trade associations to form an industrial external network to communicate cross-enterprise communications. NGN OSS: Launched as a proposal command and control application, which provides needed applications To implement and complete the back-end functions requested by the end-users initiated by the aforementioned website control application. Furthermore, this application can enable a supplier to provision and start new services, which is based on optimizing the next-generation supplier 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 208 This paper size applies to Chinese national standards CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (1 force) The enterprise program spans the circuit and packet section of NGN in an intuitive and high-productivity manner. In addition, the prototype can demonstrate supplier support functions 'such as the ability to place orders online or offline, and then verify credit within a few minutes' to validate the service order configuration to supply in a manner that involves the fewest user operators of this process, Test and start the service. This ability will greatly improve the efficiency and productivity of the supplier, because the traditional time structure is 21 to 60 days from order placement to service start-up, depending on the complexity of the service. Using NGN system capabilities, this interval can be reduced by 21 to 60 °. Finally, it will provide an end-user with an unprecedented view of the network, which delivers services through alerts, performance, and difficult information that impacts the services users use. These capabilities improve customer confidence in the supplier and present the supplier as a leading customer service oriented organization. Benefits of the NGN Enterprise Simulator The specific benefits of the NGN Enterprise Simulator are divided into three areas: NGN network provider benefits, alliance and supplier partnership benefits, and customer benefits. These three are listed in the table below. The learning tool-NGN Enterprise Simulator provides the first clear view of the NGN environment in a risk-free environment. The network shows that customers can sell tools-NGN Enterprise Simulator to give customers a transparent view of the first NGN environment. It also showcases the implementation and delivery capabilities of network providers and demonstrates the capabilities that customers can deploy. Sales credentials-The NGN Enterprise Simulator will enable network provider alliances and supplier partnership products to be related to the first proven solution. This has led to the active deployment of its products in the NGN market. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 209 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- clothing -------- order- -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (αίο) Printed and expanded services provided by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Business. "Single-Stop Shopping,-NGN Enterprise Simulator demonstrates all services and capabilities that can be provided on the next generation network. Through a single-stop shopping environment, customers can choose the entire solution or specific components." Single-stop shopping "-because of the NGN enterprise The simulator displays assets and solutions from the communication market supplies of all network providers, which enables customers to see many solutions in an integrated environment. Improved Image-NGN Enterprise Simulator provides network provision for alliances and supplier partners Directly related to this, an innovative enterprise integrator. Training-NGN Enterprise Simulator provides training schools for customers' employees to learn how to manage and operate the network. Training-NGN Enterprise Simulator can be used to train network providers Personnel network implementation and NGN creation, conversion, ability and service delivery. Multiple Supply-Because NGN Enterprise Simulator can combine multiple market supplies, alliances and supplier partners can balance their products and investments across many service supplies Guidance services-because the NGN Enterprise Simulator is One-sided environment, which allows customers to launch a new service in a risk-free environment. Leadership-Through the creation of the NGN Enterprise Simulator, the network provider can show that he has become an innovative leader. A sub-K network operation model. Leadership role 1 由 Created by the NGN Enterprise Simulator, alliances and supplier partners will be considered leaders in the communications industry. Leasing equipment-using the network that connects customers To establish NGN methodology and MO assets-Future Sales-NGN Enterprise Simulator in Network Providers and Alliances and Supply 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 210 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Installation ---- 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (Working) NGN Enterprise Simulator, NGN Enterprise Simulator enables customers to rent network equipment without having to Buy it yourself. The NGN Enterprise Simulator can showcase specific BIM and plan deliverables, such as methodology, toolsets, work plans, budgets, and scripting models. Can be balanced to facilitate and enforce agreements. Establish a relationship between business partners. This relationship can introduce future sales (products) when the NGN network is implemented on the client side. Minimum risk-because the NGN enterprise simulator balances other internal networks Provider market supply and the knowledge and equipment of selected alliances and supplier partners, it reduces the cost of NGN enterprise simulators. Minimum risk-because NGN enterprise simulators use the network technology and resources of network providers, it reduces Investment of alliances and supplier partners. Future Experiments-The NGN Enterprise Simulator creates the main components of an extensible environmental enterprise simulator for the experiments of future network providers, selected suppliers and customers. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Economy The current scope of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperative Cooperative Printing and Printing Enterprise Simulator includes several major components. Refer to Figure 69. The shaded parts indicate the components within the framework of the network. Purpose of communication requirements: Essential requirements for establishing a network of NGN enterprise simulators Method link: NS method version 4.0-Purpose of network planning deliverables Network architecture capabilities 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 211 This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 1226164 V. Description of invention (Wl) The communication requirements of the network architecture are obtained from the following basic purpose forms that it should accomplish. The network should provide a data connection at the site. It enables the display of remote capabilities at specific sites (such as e-commerce in Palo Alto, network creation tools in Minneapolis and Sofia Antipolis). The network should be able to support the display of specific files for advanced IP services (such as VoIP, Fax over IP, IPVPN). The network should provide a certain level of service quality to support these advanced IP services. The network should allow Network Creation (NC) capabilities to be demonstrated in a "live environment". That is, the NC display data can come from the field network, not from the database of virtual data. The network should allow Network Assurance (NA) capabilities to be demonstrated in a "live environment" manner. The network should allow Network Provisioning (NP) capabilities to be demonstrated in a "live environment". The network must perform IP conversations across ATMs in the backbone, as these are better technologies used in NGN networks and new core networks. The network must be sturdy enough to serve as a customer market trial for telex solution center customers' media and next-generation services. Proposed publication plan The enterprise simulator can be deployed in several stages over a period of months. Different site locations can be published with the capabilities shown in Figure 70. The plan connects to the network architecture on a rolling basis. Position requirements 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 212 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ---- Order --- ------ line ^ 11 ^ ". Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 ________B7 _ V. Description of the Invention In the exemplary embodiment, the network architecture can connect 8 locations around the world; Play a specific role in accomplishing the goals of the overall business simulator. The network architecture can provide connections between example locations as shown in Figure 71. 1. Minneapolis: balances the work performed on the telex network and can be used as the first-level network operation center. 2. Palo Alto: Can be used to demonstrate e-commerce capabilities. 3. Sophia Antipolis: Controls CST and is therefore the main location for European companies. Sophia Antipolis can control the second-tier network operations center that follows Minneapolis. 4. Northbrook: leading research and development of methodologies and e-commerce capabilities. 5. Windsor: Can be connected to showcase the next generation smart store environment. 6. Dallas: Provides information market location and can also provide call center facilities for integration into enterprise simulators. 7. Madrid: The most important telex work solution centre in Europe and work for ELA customers may be quite important. 8. San Ramon · Can be used to demonstrate e-commerce capabilities. More or different locations can be attached to the Enterprise Simulator. At this point 'these will be the core children of the paradigm. Future locations can be planned, designed, and built just like exact copies of any of the locations listed above. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 213 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) r · Shang ------- -Order ---------. Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers’ Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of Invention (1 \ Doo) Bandwidth Demand Bandwidth Demand decisions should be made during the capacity planning phase. The initial concept design assumed that for the first version, the 2MB / S ATM capability would meet the bandwidth requirements of connecting the starting sites (such as Minneapolis, Sophia Antipolis, and Palo Alto) . Bandwidth requirements change during the life of the plan, when further decisions take into account where supplier services and e-commerce applications need to be supported and where third parties may use the Internet. The following assumptions in terms of hardware requirements were taken into account. The design should choose the solution that has the greatest capacity for capacity upgrades. Performance requirements There is a requirement to be fully available during a corporate simulation. Due to the difference in time zones between nodes, this actually creates a high level of demand for 24x7 availability. Because this requirement may lead to overinvestment in personnel, this requirement can be reduced when the first release of the network architecture does not occur (companies (like customer market trials)) will use the network infrastructure. This resource increases linearly with network usage. Appropriate service level agreements can be defined between the network conversion market to supply customers and the bidders who maintain the overall network. Security requirements The network should provide a certain level at each access point and at each level (that is, physical and logical). Degree of security. In addition, although network management platforms generally provide security management functions, the network architecture should be compatible with and support these functions. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 214 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back ^ ^ before filling this page)-Order ------ --- Line_ A7 1226164 --------- B7 _ V. Description of the invention (: x 丨 5) Communication concept architecture design purpose: to provide a high-level perspective on alternative network design alternatives and evaluate Relative advantages and disadvantages. Connection method: NS method version 4.0-Network planning deliverables The network should meet these high-level requirements: General capabilities: Support video conferences, such as NetMeeting and Intel's ProShare 〇 Support streaming video. Support for IP phones (integrated with PABX). Support 3270 simulation of client host and print from 3270 host. Supports remote login (telnet) and X-Window to talk to UNIX hosts. Support FTP file transfer between telex network and client site. Supports HTTP traffic within telex networks and client sites. Supports customer-specific mail traffic (MS Mail, MS Exchange, Lotus Notes, HP Open Mail) and SMTP and LDAP 〇 Supports file server access between telex network sites and client sites. Support Teleworks Windows Workbench traffic (such as SQL * Net) 〇 Reliability: 7 * 24 support according to plan or user specified requirements, should provide backup link (Redundant link) when needed 〇 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 215 ^ Zhang scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order ---- ----- line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (WG) Network management: Management should be provided by a central maintenance organization, which can provide service level agreements (Slab's), rather than having management methods spread across multiple different organizations. Supports Simple Netwwk Management Protocol (SNMP) 〇 Conceptual Design Alternatives-Benefit Comparison This section provides a description of each conceptual design alternative. It shows the different types of collaboration that can be faced. Evaluation of each script is provided at a high level. To complete this high-level analysis, the main evaluation criteria are described with a focus on the main requirements of the network architecture. Main assessment factors The important aspects of reading the needs of each alternative are as follows. They are the main drivers of choosing the best solution. 1. Simulator requirements The network architecture should support the following network capabilities: Network creation services and network provisioning / startup services and network assurance At the top of network capabilities, enterprise simulators can have feature-rich service platforms that provide The following next generation service capabilities. Basic IP data service series VoIP service series IP VPN service series 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 216 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- -Install --------- Order · -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Explanation (αη) For non-communications industry users, the business simulator can show how to effectively use new business capabilities in the electronic economy. These new business capabilities can be balanced from different organizations, such as CST (Center of Strategic Technology), thus showing the electronic economic environment. For example: Da Vinci II (or other equivalent) in Sophia Antipolis. The Smart Store in Windsor, UK Other e-retailers and e-banking environments in the United States2. Network costs This is a major dimension, it will explore the possibility of sharing the entire network infrastructure or some links with other groups Sex. Network construction and operation costs must be carefully investigated, even at the high level of detail, in order to define planning strategies. The choice of sharing network involves a definition of decentralized costs. Implementation time The time required to set up the network must be carefully studied, especially since it usually takes 60 working days to establish a high-capacity link between international sites. There may also be long delays in the transfer of hardware equipment (component equipment). Security This aspect should not be underestimated when thinking about the interconnection between the sites selected by Cisco and HP. Therefore, network design must ask this important question. It also represents the main key to script selection. Safety is the main concern of many users, so the solution must be able to use the security of the Internet 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 217 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)- ----------------- Order -------- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Work 8) Convince them in essence, especially in this article, their network goals must also enable users to perform "Market Trial". 5. Traffic Mixing / Bandwidth Management When evaluating opportunities to share a network with a second network or take the choice of using an installed or planned service network infrastructure, special attention must be given to the allocation of traffic. Traffic on the network is not limited to the traffic generated by enterprise simulator applications / services, thus reducing the ability to control, predict and plan network capacity. 6. Network management The capabilities that should be demonstrated by the enterprise simulator are strongly combined with network management activities. Where links and network components are shared, it should be examined how controls in network management are performed. Effective network management may require single-contact contacts as an extension of management and service level issues. 7. Network manageability The manageability comparison is related to the ability to take decisions; that is, to make basic changes without compromising the entities that share the network infrastructure. This is called the degree of freedom provided by the scheme, and in this plan, it means the ability to maintain control on the network in order to meet expectations. spare

Depending on what type of service and under what circumstances it will be used, the network architecture of the network should provide backup links to ensure a certain level of service to prevent errors from occurring. Standby requirements may not be necessary in the prototype plan, but if one of the potential partners (such as TWNet) makes a request, it needs to be carefully considered. On the other hand, to showcase NGN

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). -------- Order --------- (Please read the back first Please pay attention to this page and fill in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, 1226164 A7 --- 2Z ----__ V. Invention Description The capabilities of the enterprise simulator must have a complete mesh network ( meshed network) ° Design alternative and benefit comparison narrative option 1: Full ownership (private network) This option involves connecting each site with a private link without using any existing network. It therefore implies that all sites need to be equipped with the necessary network components. Benefits Disadvantages Traffic is limited to the traffic generated by the services defined and managed by the Enterprise Simulator. Unless there is a decision to resell part of the available capacity, there is no bandwidth management.-Full ownership of the network gives complete freedom to determine the overall network architecture, manage traffic, etc. (no sharing decision!). Network management-full control over the management network (the NMS / MN market supply can have the perfect testing laboratory to test their proposed solutions), service assurance and service provisioning systems can be tested in a risk-free environment. Through the middleman such as Band-X to resell bandwidth and invest a lot of investment (rental link, drip circuit components), operating costs (need to be properly put into the network management structure). Implementation time (delays in shipping network components and installation links) Requires the installation of backup links to provide a reliable network (increased cost) The need to properly put in a security system to protect the network (increased cost), especially if the network & Partners connect with each other and if clients perform market trials in this environment. Option 1 (Version 2): Full Ownership (Partnership with Telex Communication Provider) In this option, you can expand your alliance with Telex communication providers. It is assumed that in this option the telecom provider provides free bandwidth. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 219 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the note on the back first? Matters before filling out this page) Installation ---- Order --- ------. 1226164 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (U0) All the benefits are lacking ~ The benefits (option ^ 77 ^ full ownership) As for the network components, a large amount of investment is still required, but the telex with the partnership Communication provider partnerships can significantly reduce the cost of connectivity. Reduce implementation time for link building. Spare (fully meshed) is available at low cost. Yuandang #) Yunjian Road is suitable for ί and-|, | ί β 罔 ink 力 κ ιπίϋ 乂 and Jianti 値 SI1 (basic time point price required by key points) ° ° (W Ji Shi late. The lack of supply must have The contract should be submitted in a timely manner. You should call me. If you pass the information provided by the International Alliance of Producers and the National Alliance, and submit the information and submit the information to the person who submitted the information. The League of Nations of the League of Nations sent the Legislative Union, the partners are in the department ^) and the households check all Θ some customers try to install _ some Ruochang enter g and the market (^ Road to the road network access to the network, if the network is suitable for protection It is the realm to protect each other's environment.

Option 2: VPN on the public internet This option involves connecting each site via a virtual private network on the public internet. This solution can be implemented without using any existing or planned links. Benefits and Costs Minimized The main capabilities of the enterprise simulator were demonstrated because control over bandwidth and network management did not exist. Security is a topic of traffic on the public Internet. I miss design alternatives-choose to install -------- order --------- ^ ewi (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative prints

Option 1 (version 2) of "full ownership (in partnership with a telex provider)" is preferred, especially since it best meets the needs of an enterprise simulator. The "Alternative Solutions Evaluation Matrix" can be found in Figure 72: it is 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7___ 5. The purpose of the invention statement (H \) is to evaluate the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative at a high level by specifying a comparative rating for each region As mentioned earlier, the main advantages of a "full ownership" solution are the ability to meet the goals of the Enterprise Simulator and support the development of business capabilities such as network creation, network assurance, and network provisioning. Any other solution can better meet the goal, because an enterprise simulator team can have complete control and complete freedom over the network. For example, the overall structure of the network infrastructure does not need to be shared with third parties, and it does not need to be mixed with third parties. Traffic 'and has full control over network management, which represents the main building block of network assurance capabilities. Taken as a whole It not only guarantees the establishment of a risk-free enterprise simulator capability testing environment, but also provides users with a test bed to host the final "market trial". When the network infrastructure can be fully owned by the enterprise simulator team, The security risks caused by connecting to non-group organizations can be greatly reduced, as if they are not connected to the external network. This does not mean that security features can be ignored, but this requirement is compared with other cases. It ’s less important because other cases send fairly confidential information over a network 'and third-party organizations have access to the confidential information. The main disadvantages of a “full ownership” solution are its cost and implementation time. Implementation The time between order and delivery represents the shortcomings of this solution. Suggested purpose of communication architecture: Evaluation of network components in terms of network components. Methodology Connections: NS Method Version 4 · 0—Network Planning Deliverables

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love j ----------- Aw ^ -------- order- ------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 ^ ~ Description of the invention Is the better option 'because it provides complete freedom in designing network construction. There are two main options when designing network construction: (1) simple connection network; and (2) supplier-level edge network To better understand the content, the following will describe the classification of the main network components of the endpoint infrastructure that constitute the entire network. As shown in Figure 73, there is a wide area network (WAN) at the most basic level. 73 〇0 connects individual customers or communities in a useful and cost-effective way. The customer network 7302 includes local area network (LAN) equipment (optional) and the hardware used to connect to WAN 7300. Equipment. Service providers configure hardware, software, and personnel to network The maximum use. The use of the Internet comes from the services it enables: how well each service can solve customer problems' ~ how quickly a service can be deployed to customers, and how reliable the service performance can be. To assist The profit generation will be best_reduced_cost. Service provider networks usually include two layers: edge 7304 and core 7306. The "edge" of the network, 73 04 is used to deploy profit generation services. Core 7306 The cost is optimized by optimizing the bandwidth to provide efficient transmission and edge-provided Udge-pr0Vided traffic. Figure 74 shows the interaction of the WAN "⑽ components in the figure. Customer Network

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 ^ 5 ^ 222 ------------------ Order ---- ----- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 —_______ B7 _ V. Description of invention b3 >) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling this page) Customer Network 7 3 02 is basically composed of local area network equipment to support customers' corporate capabilities. However, the important equipment that forms the customer network 7302 is the hardware / software that provides access to the WAN. The local area network carries not only data traffic 'but also voice traffic. The development of customer applications requires more and more services and bandwidth. This demand is largely borne by the proliferation of IP on desktop computers across businesses and homes. Service providers must be prepared to provide the quality of service, bandwidth and enhanced services that customers expect (such as voice over IP's IP virtual private network and similar services). It should be kept in mind that with the release of new data services, the customer network infrastructure should be very flexible to support this service, and it should be adjustable to support the growth of bandwidth requirements. Edge Network The network components that make up Edge Network 7304 provide services to customers on this network. In other words, service providers deploy a network edge to serve their customers. Retail providers serving corporate customers can choose to use their edge network 7304 to deploy frame relay, SNA transfers, IP physical private networks, or managed voice / data services. Enhanced service enhancements can optionally be provided by the edge network. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics The Edge Network 7 3 04 includes an interface that brings in end-user traffic. The edge network 7 3 04 also provides a "meet point" or a network terminating point (NTP) between a service provider and a service customer. The customer's service quality perception of the performance of the edge platform depends on the customer; The time of service deployment is related to the provisioning activities on the edge platform; any enhanced services are enhanced by the edge platform. Therefore, the edge platform mentions 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 223 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of invention α (Calling) Provide the greatest opportunity for service differences relative to competition. The capabilities of the edge platform provide a competitive advantage to deploy new services. The core network 73 04 exists to serve customers, while the network core 7306 exists to serve the edge. Core 7306 is mainly responsible for combining low-speed traffic streams from edge devices into high-speed trunks, simplifying network topology, and achieving bandwidth efficiency across the transmission infrastructure. The core nodes must transmit a very large amount of traffic and need to be adjustable for very high switching capacity. The availability of Core 7306 is also key to ensuring that core mistakes do not affect the quality of service provided by the edge platform. Finally, because end-user customers do not need to connect directly to the core platform, there is no need for the interface variability required in edge switches. Conversely, core network components only need to provide high-speed interfaces to gather edge traffic. In many networks, the core 7306 provides flexible transmission to more than one edge network. These edges can include NEs from more than one vendor. Even in a single edge network, the edge and core νε can be provided by different vendors. Therefore, the core platform should be based on standards to support different types of configurations. Two options for a network infrastructure for network construction As described in the previous paragraph, the overall infrastructure for an endpoint-to-endpoint network consists of three main parts. The ideal solution for the simulator is to build the entire network infrastructure. The way is to gradually build the entire network architecture. But given the goals (discussed above), network building infrastructure can follow two main directions to meet demand. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 224 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ^ -------- Order --------- (Please read first Note on the back? Matters need to be completed on this page) 1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs π A7 V. Description of the invention (1) "Simple Connectivity", the first option of the solution is based on "group Network (corporate network) architecture and technology to build a network infrastructure. It constitutes a first step and initiates the basic data link between the site and a risk-free environment, from the perspective of customers Test new data and voice services. (2) "Supplier-level edge network" solution When it is necessary to further establish the customer's network infrastructure (that is, the corporate network), and also build the service provider or provider's The second option is even more ambitious when presenting the network infrastructure of a point (ie, "edge" component). Please note that the customer infrastructure is almost the same as the "simple connection" solution. The additional price of this solution is May occur at the service provider side and the required simulation enablement to be able to deliver the service. Another reason is that the edge infrastructure of the service provider constitutes a "intersection" with its customers, which is where the service deployment and services are enhanced Providers tend to spend more. Each option is described in the next section on the following items: 1. High-level network architecture 2. Component conceptual design Finally, these two options are capable of achieving the goal of network construction Let's make a comparison. Based on this comparison, one of the options will be selected, and then enter the analysis and design and subsequent build and test period. Figures 75 to 79 confirm the issues and options that need to be fully considered when implementing detailed network design. These diagrams also define what the network should support

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 225 Pack -------- Order --------- ^ ___ w (Please (Read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7

Fifth, the description of the main service of the invention description (1 bucket), and it needs to appear in the detailed design stage. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) In particular, Figures 75a, Wb, and 75c provide descriptions of the services that can be supported by the simulator. Figure 75a shows services based on customer needs, while Figure 75b shows service characteristics. Figure 75c shows exemplary efficiency requirements for the service and a sample service interface. Figure 76 discusses the network implications of choosing a provider-level edge network option. Figure 77 examines the implications of choosing a simple connection network option. Figure 78 shows the options for the various components of the τκ network. It should be noted that the network may need to support the connection between the network management system and the managed network elements. This can use 0 + M PDUs in the IP network layer, private protocols, or via decentralized networks. In addition, for applications, such as customer network management and device access to these components through delivered IP / ATM services may be required. Option A-"Simple Connection" Option A-"Simple Connection"-High-level Network Architecture Concept Design Figure 79 shows an example of Option A, which provides basic IP connectivity between sites. It makes it easy for client applications at each site to communicate 'without emulating the network infrastructure of a service provider or provider. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs It should be kept in mind that this solution itself does not tend to establish credibility with carrier supplier customers. This network is designed to simulate a customer type of network (such as a group network), which provides basic data links between sites. The principle followed is to use equipment that needs to be flexible enough to have

4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 A7 ___ B7____ V. Description of Invention (U7)) Long Service life, and therefore need to be able to support the display of new IP services (such as VoIP or IPVPN) released by sub-network construction. When this solution mainly focuses on providing data connection between sites and considering the use of ATM backbones, the equipment that interconnects the sites should be selected to be the enterprise router that provides the ATM interface. The Cisco router 7500 series with ATM interface E3 / DS3Coax meets this overall requirement. This solution sets the 2Mbit / s ATM PVC through the cable and the wireless ATM core network, so that each site can be connected to each other. It should be noted that this type is not a native ATM switch, but an IP router with an ATM interface. E3 / DS 3 interface provides adjustable retention capability (can be adjusted to 34Mbit / s / 45Mbit / s). It has a backplane size suitable for small to medium-sized networks. This router provides a wide range of interfaces and provides flexibility in the future use of this device. The goal is to use a fast Ethernet card to connect each site to the local network. For LAN architecture, Cisco CataiySt 2900 XL series network products can be used. Some products support fast Ethernet exchange with 100Mbit / s. This option supports the Intermediate Switching Link (ISL) protocol. It is a Cisco proprietary protocol and is very similar to Layer 3 switching. When connected to a Cisco router,

This protocol enables enhanced VLAN capabilities. Only one physical connection is required between the switch and the router, and this connection occurs on the 100BaseT intermediary switching link module. It can then generate and execute the required number of subnets (logical IP networks) on this configuration. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ----------- installation -------- order --- ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 —_______ B7___ Five N invention description (Up All sites are connected to the core with E3 / DS3 link on the cable and wireless ATM long-distance network Nodes. The connection between sites is routed on ATM P VC with SCR (Sustain Cell Rate) of 2Mbit / s. In the first demonstration release (such as Minneapolis, Sophia Antibes) Reese and Palo Alto), three PVCs can be established: Minneapolis ... Sophia Antipolis, Minapolis-Palo Alto, and Palo Alto ... Minneapolis. Option A-Architectural components of the design. The following sections make the minimum required network hardware and software components required for each release (note that in this analysis step, it is assumed that each site has the same Infrastructure): Release Version 1:-3 Cisco Router 7500 Series (ATM E3 / DS3 Card) 3 Cisc o Catalyst 2900 XL (optional fast Ethernet) release version 2: 2 Cisco routers 75 00 series (ATM E3 card) 2 Cisco Catalyst 2 9 00 XL (optional fast Ethernet) release version 3: 2 Cisco Router 75 00 Series (ATM E3 Card) 2 Cisco Catalyst 2 900 XL (Option Fast Ethernet) Release 4: 1 Cisco Router 7500 (ATM E3 Card) 1 Cisco Catalyst 2916 XL (Option Fast Ethernet Network) Option B-"Supplier-level Edge Network" 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 228 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) Binding --------- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 1226164 B7 V. Description of Invention (llj) Option B-High-level Network Architecture Design Design Figure 80 shows the options The network example of B. This network is designed to form an edge network, and the above "simple connection network" can be connected to it. It can deploy the simple connection network option first, and then later Stage added "Supplier Level Edge Network ”. This network option is designed to simulate a service provider or supplier network as much as possible within the constraints of adjustability and cost. The following general differences exist between service provider / provider networks and customer networks: the use of provider-level equipment; the use of hierarchical architecture and routing; the use of network interface protocols by networks; extensive management requirements Fiber level; use of stand-alone gateways; and equipment needs to be flexible enough to have a long service life. The use of supplier-level equipment The differences between supplier-level equipment and customer preset equipment are as follows: higher availability; greater flexibility in application; longer service life; and tailor-made operation and Maintenance Functionality This equipment is mostly from specific vendors focused on this small market segment. For these “traditional” suppliers, the current trend is to merge or form alliances with suppliers that build customer bases from the corporate internet market. However, there are still differences between supplier-grade equipment and enterprise equipment in the combined product range. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 229 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 male 1) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Installation ¢. Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employees ’Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economics and Intellectual Property Bureau printed 1226164 _ B7_ The sequence needs to be reflected in the enterprise simulator network. This helps build credit with supplier customers. In this network option, the CISCO MG28 85 0 WAN switch is the preferred primary edge switch. The reason is as follows = This is a supplier-level device and has been used by companies deploying NGN / Future Core Networks (Sprint ION); this device has a high availability of 9.9.995% and supports such as remote software download Features such as hot card swap and service upgrade should be mapped to the enterprise capabilities that can be demonstrated; and this device is adjustable (lGbit / s-45Gbit / s) and includes IP and ATM exchange capabilities. Hierarchical Structure and Use of Routing It tries to replicate the supplier hierarchy as much as possible in a "private network" environment. The service provider point of presence (POP) node is simulated and contains the main edge switches and gateways. The simulated customer site is connected to the core node by the remote customer site on the C & W provided by the ATM long-distance network with an E3 / T3 ATM link or an El ATM link. There are three simulated POPs, two of which are located at the same location (Sophia Antipolis in this example), and the other is located in Minneapolis in the distance. These three physical locations are for illustrative purposes only and can be changed before implementation. The co-location nodes are interconnected via a protected STM-1 fiber link to allow presentation management to the fiber level and allow full implementation of the ATM NNI signaling protocol. The remote site is connected to the wireless country through a cable 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 230 )

1226164 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _ B7 _ V. Description of Invention (β)) The Internet ATM network is used to connect to each other, and may have severely restricted A T M transmission capabilities. The customer site has a CPE, which can be a router of the Cisco 7500/7200 series. The Network Termination Point (NTP) should be on the client side of this router. Although the remote access link is simulated in this network, the actual self-provided access network is not simulated. However, in the future, it is possible to insert access transmission technologies (such as xDSL modems) into the network to replicate this level. Use of network-to-network interface protocols As part of future upgrades, network-to-network interface implementations will be ideal. Network-to-network interfaces are difficult to implement in a "private network" environment. Network design considers these interface types with limited simulation. For ATM NNI, P-NNI signaling can be implemented between two fiber-connected edge switches. ^ For the PSTN interface, SS7 may not be suitable, so the asymmetric primary rate signaling of symmetric DPNSS will be met by the PSTN gateway. Extensive management requirements to the fiber level Supplier networks mostly follow the fiber infrastructure, so the management capabilities of the fiber show that integration into the network management system is important. The network can implement dual STM-1 network links with SDH protection enabled in between, allowing departmental management and alternative mechanisms to be displayed to implement network re-routing along the IP level. Stand-alone gateway 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 231 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- install- ------ Order --------- ^ 9. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 V. Invention Description The network is best provided for VoIP and FAX over IP Two types of gateways: (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) "Independent" is located on one of the POPs: and is located on the customer LAN or in the user's workstation. The stand-alone gateway can be used as an interface between the PABX on the corporate network that simulates a local PSTN switch and the IP network connected to the MGX via Ethernet or high-speed LAN. The customer gateway can be implemented: in a dedicated workstation connected to the customer's LAN; or in software and hardware (such as an expansion card) in the user workstation. The exact method is the future following the detailed definition of VoIP services. Investigate the subject. The device needs to be flexible, and has a longer service life. The MGX WAN switch is chosen as the better switch because: it combines IP routers and ATM switches; it passes from Ethernet to E1 / T1 to STM- 16 wide-range interfaces; and it supports CISCO WAN management software that is more suitable for suppliers and service providers. Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Employee Consumer Cooperative, Printed Option B-Architecture Component Design The following sections list the minimum required network hardware and software components for each release: Release Version 1: 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 232 copies Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I226164 A7

V. Description of the Invention 0) 3 Cisco MGX 8 85 0 4 Cisco Router 7500 Series (ATM E 3 / D S3 Card) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page \ 4 Cisco Catalyst 2900 XL ( Option Fast Ethernet) (Note that in this analysis step, each site of releases 2, 3, and 4 can have the same infrastructure) Release 2: 2 Cisco routers 7500 series (ATM E3 card) 2 Cisco Catalyst 2900 XL (optional fast Ethernet) release version 3: 2 Cisco routers 75 00 series (ATM E3 card) 2 Cisco Catalyst 2900 XL (optional fast Ethernet) release version 4: 1 Cisco Router 7500 (ATM E3 Card) 1 Cisco Catalyst 2916 XL (Option Fast Ethernet) Figures 81a to 8 Id show tables that summarize the scope of the different goals each solution achieves. Network Management Strategy The Ministry of Economic Affairs ’Intellectual Property Bureau ’s staff ’s consumer cooperative ’s printed clothing display supplier-level network management system and the use of this network should be the main requirement. Centralized network management facilities should be provided (eg in Minneapolis) , And disaster recovery facilities should also be provided (such as in Sophia Antipolis). The demonstration of disaster recovery functionality will form the building blocks of service assurance capabilities. 'Network management systems should be at the network management level (also That is, as many as possible on the lower level of CISCO IP Manager, CISCO WAN Manager) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 233 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 Wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by A7 in the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau. V. Invention Description Uses standard CISCO service management system components. At the component management level, system options can be determined by the needs and implementation methods of each enterprise capability to be demonstrated. Purpose of communication architecture issues : Emphasizes questions about the construction of recommended network architectures Method Link: NS Method Version 4.0-Network Planning Deliverables Limitations In this script, it is assumed that the implementation of each of these options is heavily dependent on the hardware provider (such as CISCO ) And an alliance of bandwidth providers such as Cable & Wireless. The main impacts and considerations are listed below: CISCO Expert Funding In particular, Option B's "provider-level edge network," may have an obligation to establish a strong communication link with Cisco experts on the MGX 8850. The ideal solution would be to have at least one expert who participates in Option B in full detail design. Otherwise, only given the limited information collected and Cisco's insufficient technology for this particular issue, detailed design can only be completed in part. As a result, the publication of incomplete solutions will not be consistent with the goals of network construction. It can severely damage the entire NGn enterprise simulator. Other important aspects are that Cisco experts must help make the concept design effective, and work to implement valuable prototypes that can be shown to customers. CISCO order and delivery interval time (Cisco Lead-Time

Delivery) 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 234 ----------- installation -------- order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 1226164 A7 Printed clothing B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (J35)

Pre-order and delivery intervals for Cisco equipment are quite long. This point should therefore be carefully considered. Cable and Wireless Contact Point Preferably, cable and wireless provide ATM connection between two sites. For detailed network construction design, formal communication channels need to be established with them. It serves as a guide to the technical specifications of the solutions that can be provided. The detailed design of the network architecture can be done with these parameters, thus confirming the feasibility of the solution. risk

The following table assesses the risks involved in deploying a network infrastructure and compares the risk severity of Option A with Option B. Risks Option A Option B ATM link ordering and delivery interval delivery time must be carefully considered (ATM access solutions are still not ready everywhere and service providers are experiencing severe delays, especially in Europe). Last-mile access from the POP of the ATM service provider to the US site can be a problem (US regulations), as the local provider's infrastructure may be required. It implies technical problems and additional costs. Cables and wireless ATM services do not have sufficient functionality, such as the transmission of P-NNI signaling data units. They do not have the ability to support endpoint control of endpoint delays, so that the required capabilities can be meaningfully demonstrated. The detailed functionality of CISCO routers and WAN switches is insufficient or inconsistent, preventing endpoint-to-endpoint services from being implemented. The overall network integration is more complex than originally expected, leading to serious interworking issues among customers, POP and C & W core devices. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 235 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 meals) ----------- · Installation -------- Order- -------- ^ # 1 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (I #) The development of the IP exchange program has made it possible for suppliers to quickly adopt Determines the pure IP infrastructure of the QOS mechanism, so it is necessary to quickly update or replace the MG2 8850 switch. The traffic capacity of the display service grew rapidly and unexpectedly, surpassing the ability of routers and core infrastructure to handle demand. Network management system integration was more complicated than originally expected, and gradually undermined efforts to generate end-to-end capabilities. Failure to find a bandwidth solution for the network management data communication network supply resulted in the need for a separate NMS DCN for coverage. The equipment selected is over-operational for the particular application being implemented, resulting in non-cost-effective use of capital resources. Neither option provides redundant connections between network components (such as routers, MGX8650) and the site, so the network presents a single point of failure. These two options do not suggest security features. When the network structure is connected to a third party, a firewall can be added. Adequate maintenance resources may not be guaranteed for a network with proper training and support. An agreed SLA is important between the NT Market Supply Team member and a designated maintenance agent. Implementation method (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Installation ----- I--Order · --- It is best to adopt a two-stage method for the network construction of the printing of the employee consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Design and implementation: First, design and implement network construction based on the "simple connection" solution, and then upgrade the network to a "provider-level edge network" solution. The “simple connection” solution forms part of the network architecture for Release I capabilities. 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 236 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Property Bureau 1226164 _B7_ V. Description of Invention (II) Wire and Wireless (cwc) is a model provider for the construction of an enterprise simulator network. The “Supplier Level Edge Network” solution forms the network building block for Release II capabilities. The reasons for choosing the two-phase approach are: Initiate full-capacity demonstration The "simple connection" solution allows the demonstration of basic capabilities. In order to demonstrate capabilities to potential supplier customers, it must be replicated to limited available resources, the only characteristics that may exist in the supplier / future core network. These are more fully enabled by the "Supplier Level Edge Network" solution. Reducing risk Technical support for "supplier-level" equipment that forms the main building block of a "supplier-level edge network" solution is limited to the supplier. The detailed design of this network specifies the strong involvement of scarce “vendor-level” equipment experts. The detailed design of the Supplier Level option is generally more complex and more risky than the Simple Connect option. The detailed design and implementation of the two-stage approach allows suitable resources to be mobilized at both ends within a realistic time frame. Material Cost Purpose: Schedule and Cost of Deliverables and Detailed Resource Planning Method Links: NS Method Version 4.0-Outline of Network Planning Deliverables Communication Organization Strategy Outline 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 237 This paper standard applies Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------- J ^ _w ^ -------- Order --------- (Please read the first Please fill in this page again for attention) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention & Research) Purpose: List high-level strategic outlines at each node for the development of an appropriate organizational structure to support the network. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page.) Linking method: NS Method Version 4.0-Network Planning Deliverables Organizational Requirements The following is an example of organizational requirements on each node of the enterprise simulator network. For the assessment of organizational impact, the following scales are used:

High (H) = use 50% to 100% FTE

Medium (M) = use 30% to 50% FTE

Low (L) = up to 30% FTE

Location Organizational Needs Impact 1 Minneapolis-Tier 1 NOC appoints a person with proper network management and Tier 2 maintenance skills. ί Needs a full-time position Η 2 Sophia Antipolis Second Tier NOC Minneapolis Mapping Station Appoint a person with proper network management and second-tier maintenance skills. ί Need a full-time positionΗ 3 Palo Alto-Appointment of an E-Commerce Application Demonstration Position A person with appropriate network management and first-level maintenance skills does not require a full-time position Μ 4 People with proper network management and first-level maintenance skills. Full-time position is not required L 5 San Ramon-E-Commerce Application Demonstration Position Appoint a person with proper network management and first-level maintenance skills. Full-time position not required L 6 Dallas-Demonstration location for web-enabled call center applications Appoint a person with proper network management and first-level maintenance skills. L Printed clothing for employees' cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 238 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 1226164 A7 B7 V. Full-time job description is not required 7 Madrid-Telework ELA position appoints a person with proper network management and first level maintenance skills. Full-time position is not required. L 8 Windsor-Next Generation Smart Store Environmental Showcase Appoint a person with proper network management and first-level maintenance skills. A full-time position M is not necessary. In summary, although the present invention has been disclosed as above with a preferred embodiment, it is not intended to limit the present invention. Any person skilled in the art should not depart from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Various modifications and retouchings are made, so the protection scope of the present invention shall be determined by the scope of the appended patent application. ----------- Installation -------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Cooperative printed leftover clothing 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 239 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

1226164. VI. Patent Application Replacement Page 2004/05/21 Case No. 89Π7726 1. A method for predictive error management through the network, including: (a) monitoring the performance of a network; (b) confirming that Any degradation in the performance of the network; (c) predicting the future performance of one of the networks, based on the degradation identified in the performance of the network; (d) comparing the predicted Future performance and the performance requirements of a number of network user service level agreements to identify any future issues in meeting that performance requirement; and (e) reconfiguring the network to avoid This problem in the process of performance requirements: · _2 · The method described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation · '. ·., ... is caused by at least one of equipment errors and physical transmission errors caused. 3. The method described in item 1 of the scope of application, further comprising continuously repeating steps (a) to (e) in a timely manner. 4. The method as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation includes network errors. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The method described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, in which the state is reorganized; this step of the network is performed in real time. 6 · —A computer-readable medium having a sector code implemented by a computer to execute a method for predictive error management through a network, the method includes ... (a) monitoring One network and one performance; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 242 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 * 297 public) 1226164 μ c: j B8 C8 D8. 6. Replacement page for patent application scope 2004/05/21 Case No. 89Π7726 Employee Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^: Social Seal IΪ (b) Confirm any degradation in the performance of the network; (C) Based on the performance of the network · The identified degradation predicts the future performance of one of the networks; (d) Compares the predicted future performance with the performance requirements of the service level agreement of a plurality of network users to confirm that these performance requirements are being met Any future issues in the process; and (e) reconfiguring the network to avoid the future issues in meeting the performance requirements. 7. The computer-readable medium as described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation is caused by at least one of a device error and a physical transmission error. • 8. The computer-readable medium as described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a code section for continuously repeating step (a) to step (e) in a real-time manner. 9. The computer-readable medium as described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation includes network errors. 10. The computer-readable medium as described in item 6 of the patent application scope, wherein step (e) is to reconfigure the network in real time. 11. A predictive error management system through a network, including: (a)-control logic to monitor a performance of a network; (b)-to confirm any performance in the performance of the network A degraded control logic; 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, AND1P122.TW 243 (Please read the precautions on the back first) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 χ 297 issued) 1226164 More: · 朁Yangbei a B8 C8 D8 Replacement Page 2004/05/21 Case No. 89117726. 6. Scope of Patent Application (0-used to predict the future performance of one of the network, based on the degradation confirmed in the performance of the network Control logic; ⑷-to control the performance requirements of the user's service, such as the yarn effect of the road, 定 to control the future of the problem in the process, and ⑷-to face the leg flaps Depends on the control logic of the problem in the process of catching demand. Λ2. The system described in item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation is caused by at least one of equipment errors and physical transmission errors. 13 . If the scope of patent application The system described in item 11 further includes a control logic that continuously repeats steps (a) to (e) in an instant manner. 14. The system described in item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the degradation includes a network Road error. 15. The system as described in item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the control logic for reconfiguring the network to avoid the problem in satisfying the performance requirements instantly reconfigures the network Road ° Consumer Cooperatives of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4HICKMAN / 200026TW, ANTD1 P122.TVV 244 This paper method is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A 彳 specifications (210 X 297 >